1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5452 arg "newline-insert newline"
5458 \begin_layout Subsection
5460 \begin_inset Index idx
5463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5490 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5499 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5500 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5501 describing some general features of all four of them.
5504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5511 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5520 reset the environment to
5524 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5525 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5526 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5534 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5543 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5545 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5546 you read all of section
5547 \begin_inset space ~
5551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5553 reference "sec:Nesting"
5560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5562 \begin_inset Index idx
5565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5586 paragraph environment.
5587 It has the following properties:
5590 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5595 \begin_layout Itemize
5596 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5604 \begin_layout Itemize
5605 The items can have any length.
5606 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5607 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 environment inside another
5623 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5627 \begin_layout Itemize
5628 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 \begin_inset space ~
5641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5643 reference "sec:Nesting"
5647 for a full explanation of nesting.
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5661 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5666 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5670 The label for the first level
5674 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 The label for the second level is a dash.
5683 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5693 \begin_layout Itemize
5694 Back out to the third level.
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5699 Back to the second level.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 Back to the outermost level.
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 These are the default labels for an
5713 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5715 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5718 dialog in the submenu
5723 \begin_inset Index idx
5726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5732 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5735 \begin_layout Standard
5736 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5737 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5739 \begin_inset space ~
5743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5745 reference "sec:Nesting"
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5766 name "sec:Enumerate"
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5778 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5779 It has these properties:
5782 \begin_layout Enumerate
5783 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5787 \begin_layout Enumerate
5788 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5792 \begin_layout Enumerate
5793 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5801 environment resets the counter to one.
5804 \begin_layout Enumerate
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5819 Items can have any length.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5823 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5835 \begin_layout Standard
5844 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5845 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5852 \begin_layout Enumerate
5853 The first level of an
5857 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5881 \begin_layout Enumerate
5882 Back to the third level
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Back to the second level.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 Back to the outermost level.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5900 environment, see section
5901 \begin_inset space ~
5905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5907 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5912 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5916 There is more to nesting
5920 environments than we've stated here.
5921 You should read section
5922 \begin_inset space ~
5926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5928 reference "sec:Nesting"
5932 to learn more about nesting.
5935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5937 \begin_inset Index idx
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_layout Standard
5950 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5954 list has no fixed label.
5955 Instead, LyX uses the first
5956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5963 of the first line as the label.
5967 \begin_layout Description
5968 Example: This is an example of the
5975 \begin_layout Standard
5976 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5989 it is meant that the first usage of the
5993 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5995 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6003 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6009 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6011 \begin_inset space ~
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6023 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6027 for more information.) Here is an example:
6030 \begin_layout Description
6032 \begin_inset space ~
6035 Example: This one shows how to use a
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Usage: You should use the
6055 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6056 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6058 It's not a good idea to use a
6062 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6063 You're better off using
6075 paragraphs into them.
6078 \begin_layout Description
6079 Nesting: You can nest
6083 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6087 \begin_layout Standard
6088 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6089 them from the first line.
6092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6094 \begin_inset Index idx
6097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6111 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6114 \begin_layout Standard
6123 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6125 Here are its properties:
6128 \begin_layout Labeling
6129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6134 labels LyX uses the first
6135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6142 of each line as the item label.
6147 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6148 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6149 space as described above.
6152 \begin_layout Labeling
6153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6154 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6155 the body of the item text.
6156 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6157 label width plus a little extra space.
6161 \begin_layout Labeling
6162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6164 \begin_inset space ~
6167 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6169 If the label width is larger, the label
6170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6177 into the first line.
6178 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6179 margin of the rest of the item text.
6182 \begin_layout Labeling
6183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6185 \begin_inset space ~
6188 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6193 environment has the same left margin.
6194 \begin_inset Newline newline
6197 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6200 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6202 \begin_inset space ~
6207 dialog (toolbar button
6210 arg "layout-paragraph"
6217 \begin_inset space ~
6222 determines the default label width.
6223 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6232 multiple times instead.
6233 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6250 every time you alter a label in a
6255 \begin_inset Newline newline
6258 The predefined default width is the length of
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6278 list the same way as the
6282 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6288 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6297 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6298 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "sec:Nesting"
6310 to learn about nesting.
6313 \begin_layout Standard
6314 There is yet another feature of the
6318 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6320 You can use additional
6324 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6329 are documented in section
6330 \begin_inset space ~
6334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6336 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6341 Here are some examples:
6344 \begin_layout Labeling
6345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6346 Left The default for
6353 \begin_layout Labeling
6354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6355 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6362 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6365 \begin_layout Labeling
6366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6378 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6381 \begin_layout Subsection
6383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6385 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6390 \begin_inset Index idx
6393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6402 \begin_layout Standard
6403 The features described in this section require that the module
6405 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6407 is loaded in the document settings.
6408 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6413 \begin_inset Index idx
6416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6417 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6426 Custom Enumerate Lists
6427 \begin_inset Index idx
6430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6431 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6441 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6444 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6447 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6448 There you add the command
6451 \begin_layout Standard
6459 \begin_layout Standard
6460 in TeX Code (shortcut
6470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6472 \begin_inset space ~
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6478 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6491 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6498 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6499 For capital Roman numerals replace
6511 in the command above.
6512 For Arabic numerals use
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 You can only number 26
6553 \begin_inset space ~
6556 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6564 \begin_layout Standard
6565 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6566 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6569 \begin_layout Standard
6570 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6573 \begin_layout Enumerate
6574 \begin_inset Argument 1
6577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6603 \begin_layout Enumerate
6604 \begin_inset Argument 1
6607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Enumerate
6635 \begin_layout Enumerate
6636 \begin_inset Argument 1
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_inset Argument 1
6667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6694 For this list these commands were used:
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6708 \begin_inset Newline newline
6716 \begin_inset Newline newline
6724 \begin_inset Newline newline
6734 \begin_layout Standard
6741 makes the label emphasized and
6750 \begin_layout Standard
6751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6760 lists until you change the definition.
6768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6770 \begin_inset Index idx
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6774 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6783 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6786 \begin_layout Enumerate
6787 \begin_inset Argument 1
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_inset Note Note
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 goes back to default numbering
6821 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_layout Standard
6829 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6839 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6840 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6843 \begin_layout Standard
6844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6861 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6863 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6864 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6865 of a normal enumeration.
6866 There, insert the command
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6875 \begin_layout Standard
6880 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6884 \begin_layout Enumerate
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Standard
6893 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6897 \begin_inset Argument 1
6900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 This enumeration starts at 4
6919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6921 \begin_inset Index idx
6924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6936 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6939 \begin_layout Itemize
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6944 with standard spacing
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6948 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6950 Add there the command
6954 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6957 \begin_layout Itemize
6958 \begin_inset Argument 1
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_layout Itemize
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Standard
6989 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6995 \begin_inset Index idx
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7005 For more information see its documentation,
7006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7018 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7019 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7023 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 with negative indentation
7055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7056 Further Customization
7057 \begin_inset Index idx
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 Lists ! Customization
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7070 You can also change the style of description lists.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 changes the description label font, the command
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7091 sets the list style.
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 An example where the command
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7103 itshape, style=nextline
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_layout Description
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7116 \begin_inset Argument 1
7119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7127 itshape, style=nextline
7137 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7138 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7142 \begin_layout Description
7144 \begin_inset space ~
7147 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7148 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7149 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7152 \begin_layout Standard
7153 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7169 For more information see its documentation
7170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7179 \begin_layout Subsection
7181 \begin_inset Index idx
7184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset space ~
7198 Address: An Overview
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7210 \begin_inset space ~
7216 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7217 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7218 In contrast, you can use the
7225 \begin_inset space ~
7230 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7231 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7236 Of course, you're not limited to using
7243 \begin_inset space ~
7252 \begin_inset space ~
7257 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7258 some European academic papers.
7261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7265 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7278 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7282 \begin_inset space ~
7287 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7288 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7289 Here's an example of each:
7292 \begin_layout Right Address
7294 \begin_inset Newline newline
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7305 When is it? What is today?
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_inset space ~
7318 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7319 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7320 Here's an example of the
7327 \begin_layout Address
7329 \begin_inset Newline newline
7332 Where do I send this
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Your post office and country
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 As you can see, both
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7352 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7357 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7363 This makes sense, since
7371 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7372 Thus, you have to use
7379 arg "newline-insert newline"
7384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7385 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7396 ) to start a new line in an
7403 \begin_inset space ~
7411 \begin_layout Subsection
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7416 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7417 or list of references.
7418 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7423 \begin_inset Index idx
7426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7440 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7441 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7442 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7443 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7457 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7458 The book document classes ignores the
7462 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7466 in a letter document class.
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7474 environment does several things for you.
7475 First, it puts the centered label
7476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7484 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7486 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7487 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7488 the subsequent text.
7489 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7490 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7494 \begin_layout Standard
7495 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7499 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7500 The new paragraph will still be in the
7505 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7506 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_inset Float figure
7515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7517 \begin_inset Graphics
7518 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7531 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7552 \begin_layout Standard
7553 We would love to demonstrate the
7557 environment, but since this document is in the
7558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7565 class, we can't do this.
7566 We inserted it therefore as figure
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7573 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7578 If you have never heard of an
7579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7586 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7591 \begin_inset Index idx
7594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7603 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7615 environment is used to list references.
7616 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7617 only use it at the end of the document.
7629 \begin_layout Standard
7630 When you first open a
7634 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7650 depending on the document class.
7651 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7652 Each paragraph of the
7656 environment is a bibliography entry.
7661 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7662 Each new paragraph is still in the
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7670 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7671 by using a BibTeX database.
7672 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7673 phy handling, have a look at section
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7680 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7688 Special Environments
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7693 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is a LyX extension.
7725 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7730 key as a fixed whitespace.
7734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 \begin_inset space ~
7751 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7764 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7766 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7769 arg "newline-insert newline"
7786 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7787 So, when you finish using the
7791 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7792 Also, you can nest the
7796 environment inside of others.
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7803 \begin_layout Itemize
7807 arg "newline-insert newline"
7810 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7815 \begin_inset space \space{}
7825 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 \begin_layout Itemize
7835 arg "newline-insert newline"
7845 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7851 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7853 You must put at least one
7857 in any line you want blank.
7858 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7861 \begin_layout Itemize
7862 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7866 since that will insert
7871 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7874 arg "self-insert \""
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7901 printf("Hello World!
7906 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 This is just the standard
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7932 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7934 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7935 as if you used a typewriter.
7936 \begin_inset Index idx
7939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 Paragraph environments|)
7945 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7948 Program Code Listings
7953 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7965 \begin_inset Index idx
7968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7982 environment is similar to the
7986 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7987 computer console text.
7992 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8005 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8006 you can have empty lines.
8018 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 have a certain language and a text style
8022 \begin_layout Itemize
8023 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8024 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8028 \begin_layout Standard
8029 Because of these properties
8033 works like a typewriter.
8037 \begin_layout Verbatim
8042 \begin_layout Verbatim
8046 The following 2 lines are empty:
8049 \begin_layout Verbatim
8053 \begin_layout Verbatim
8057 \begin_layout Verbatim
8059 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8064 \begin_layout Section
8065 Nesting Environments
8066 \begin_inset Index idx
8069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8070 Nesting ! Environments
8076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8085 \begin_layout Subsection
8089 \begin_layout Standard
8090 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8092 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8094 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8096 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8108 \begin_layout Enumerate
8112 \begin_layout Enumerate
8117 \begin_layout Enumerate
8121 \begin_layout Enumerate
8126 \begin_layout Enumerate
8130 \begin_layout Standard
8131 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8132 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8134 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8136 \begin_inset space ~
8140 \begin_inset space ~
8148 \begin_inset space ~
8152 \begin_inset space ~
8157 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8159 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8162 arg "depth-increment"
8168 arg "depth-decrement"
8182 arg "depth-increment"
8188 arg "depth-decrement"
8192 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8193 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8198 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8199 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8200 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8201 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8204 \begin_layout Standard
8205 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8206 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8208 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8211 \begin_layout Subsection
8212 What You Can and Can't Nest
8215 \begin_layout Standard
8216 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8217 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8222 than a simple yes or no.
8223 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8226 \begin_layout Itemize
8227 Completely unnestable
8230 \begin_layout Itemize
8231 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8235 \begin_layout Itemize
8236 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8240 \begin_layout Standard
8241 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8242 environments have them:
8245 \begin_layout Description
8246 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8247 Can't nest into them.
8251 \begin_layout Itemize
8257 \begin_layout Itemize
8263 \begin_layout Itemize
8269 \begin_layout Itemize
8275 \begin_layout Itemize
8282 \begin_layout Description
8284 \begin_inset space ~
8287 Nestable You can nest them.
8288 You can nest other things into them.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8316 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8334 \begin_layout Itemize
8340 \begin_layout Itemize
8347 \begin_layout Description
8348 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8349 You can't nest anything into them.
8353 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 \begin_layout Itemize
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8371 \begin_layout Itemize
8377 \begin_layout Itemize
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 \begin_layout Itemize
8395 \begin_layout Itemize
8401 \begin_layout Itemize
8407 \begin_layout Itemize
8413 \begin_layout Itemize
8419 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 \begin_layout Itemize
8431 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_inset space ~
8441 \begin_layout Itemize
8448 \begin_layout Standard
8449 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8457 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8470 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8471 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8472 nested section headings violate this.
8480 \begin_layout Subsection
8481 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8482 \begin_inset Index idx
8485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8486 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8494 \begin_layout Standard
8495 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8496 affected by nesting anyhow.
8500 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 \begin_layout Itemize
8508 \begin_layout Itemize
8512 \begin_layout Standard
8514 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8522 Figures and tables in
8526 are not affected by this.
8531 Have a look at section
8532 \begin_inset space ~
8536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8538 reference "sec:Floats"
8542 for more information about
8549 \begin_layout Standard
8550 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8551 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8555 \begin_layout Standard
8556 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8564 of its own, it behaves just like a
8565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8572 paragraph environment.
8573 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8577 \begin_layout Standard
8578 Here's an example with a table:
8581 \begin_layout Enumerate
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8587 This is (a) and it's nested.
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8592 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8598 \begin_layout Standard
8600 \begin_inset Tabular
8601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8602 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8689 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8696 \begin_layout Enumerate
8698 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8702 \begin_layout Enumerate
8706 \begin_layout Standard
8707 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8710 \begin_layout Enumerate
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8716 This is (a) and it's nested.
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8721 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8727 \begin_layout Standard
8729 \begin_inset Tabular
8730 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8731 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8732 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8733 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8817 \begin_layout Standard
8818 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8824 \begin_layout Enumerate
8831 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8834 \begin_layout Enumerate
8838 \begin_layout Standard
8839 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8846 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8849 \begin_layout Enumerate
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8855 This is (a) and it's nested.
8858 \begin_layout Standard
8859 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8865 \begin_layout Standard
8867 \begin_inset Tabular
8868 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8869 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8871 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 \begin_layout Standard
8957 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8963 \begin_layout Enumerate
8965 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8972 \begin_layout Enumerate
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8983 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8984 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8988 \begin_layout Subsection
8989 Usage and General Features
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9002 is the innermost possible depth.
9003 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9006 \begin_layout Enumerate
9007 level #1 – outermost
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 \begin_layout Enumerate
9026 \begin_layout Itemize
9031 \begin_layout Itemize
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9042 both of them in the example.
9043 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9053 For example, if we tried to nest another
9058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9065 , we would get errors.
9068 \begin_layout Subsection
9070 \begin_inset Index idx
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 \begin_layout Standard
9083 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9084 We have several examples of nested environments.
9085 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9090 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9093 \begin_layout Labeling
9094 \labelwidthstring MMM
9095 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9104 \begin_layout Labeling
9105 \labelwidthstring MMM
9106 #2-a This is level #2.
9107 We created it by using
9110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9116 arg "depth-increment"
9123 \begin_layout Labeling
9124 \labelwidthstring MMM
9125 #3-a This is level #3.
9126 This time, we just enter
9133 arg "depth-increment"
9137 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9141 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9147 arg "depth-increment"
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9159 environment, nested inside of
9160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9168 So, it's at level #4.
9169 We did this by entering
9172 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9178 arg "depth-increment"
9181 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9186 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9207 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9210 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9216 \begin_layout Labeling
9217 \labelwidthstring MMM
9218 #4-a This is level #4.
9222 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9225 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9230 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9234 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9239 keep nesting things inside
9240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9251 \begin_layout Labeling
9252 \labelwidthstring MMM
9253 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9258 \begin_layout Labeling
9259 \labelwidthstring MMM
9260 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9261 and this is level #6.
9262 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9266 \begin_layout Labeling
9267 \labelwidthstring MMM
9268 #5-b Back to level #5.
9272 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9278 arg "depth-decrement"
9285 \begin_layout Labeling
9286 \labelwidthstring MMM
9290 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9296 arg "depth-decrement"
9299 , we're back at level #4.
9303 \begin_layout Labeling
9304 \labelwidthstring MMM
9305 #3-b Back to level #3.
9306 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9310 \begin_layout Labeling
9311 \labelwidthstring MMM
9312 #2-b Back to level #2.
9317 \begin_layout Labeling
9318 \labelwidthstring MMM
9319 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9320 After this sentence, we will enter
9324 and change the paragraph environment back to
9331 \begin_layout Standard
9332 We could have also used the
9348 environment in place of the
9353 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9357 Example 2: Inheritance
9360 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9361 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9364 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9373 arg "depth-increment"
9377 \begin_inset Newline newline
9380 which, we will change to the
9388 \begin_layout Enumerate
9393 environment, at level #2.
9396 \begin_layout Enumerate
9397 Notice how the nested
9401 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9405 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9409 \begin_layout Standard
9410 We ended this example by entering
9415 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9419 and reset the nesting depth by using
9422 arg "depth-decrement"
9428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9429 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9438 \begin_inset Argument 1
9441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9442 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9450 \begin_layout Enumerate
9451 This is level #1, in an
9455 paragraph environment.
9456 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9460 \begin_layout Enumerate
9465 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9471 arg "depth-increment"
9475 Now, what happens if we nest an
9479 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9480 label be? An asterisk?
9484 \begin_layout Itemize
9494 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9495 So, its label is a bullet.
9496 (We got here by using
9499 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9505 arg "depth-increment"
9508 , then changing the environment to
9516 \begin_layout Itemize
9517 Here's level #4, produced using
9520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9526 arg "depth-increment"
9530 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9535 \begin_layout Enumerate
9536 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9538 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9543 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9547 , because we are in the
9555 environment (that is, it is an
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9575 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9576 type of numbering does LyX use?
9579 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9583 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9586 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9589 \begin_layout Enumerate
9593 arg "depth-decrement"
9596 to decrease the depth after the next
9599 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 \begin_layout Enumerate
9608 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9612 \begin_layout Enumerate
9614 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9615 numeral as the label.Why?
9618 \begin_layout Enumerate
9619 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9628 Notice, however, that LyX
9632 reset the counter for the label.
9636 \begin_layout Enumerate
9640 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9646 arg "depth-decrement"
9649 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9650 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9651 into the twofold-nested
9659 \begin_layout Enumerate
9660 The same thing happens if we do another
9663 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9669 arg "depth-decrement"
9672 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9675 \begin_layout Standard
9676 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9681 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9695 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9701 The same rule applies for the
9705 environment, as well.
9708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9709 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9712 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9714 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9715 the same detail with how we did it.
9724 \begin_layout Standard
9732 arg "depth-increment"
9739 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9740 the example in parentheses someplace.
9741 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9742 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9743 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9747 \begin_layout Enumerate
9752 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9757 Now we will add verse.
9758 \begin_inset Newline newline
9761 It will get much worse.
9762 \begin_inset Newline newline
9772 arg "depth-increment"
9783 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9784 \begin_inset Newline newline
9787 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9788 \begin_inset Newline newline
9794 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9807 \begin_layout Standard
9808 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9816 \begin_inset Tabular
9817 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9818 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9909 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 arg "depth-increment"
9925 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9931 \begin_inset Newline newline
9939 arg "depth-decrement"
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 : level #1) This is another item.
9952 Note that selecting a
9956 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9957 3 times to put the table inside the
9965 \begin_layout Quotation
9966 We're now ending the
9970 list and changing to
9975 We're still at level #1.
9976 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9977 The next set of paragraphs is a
9978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9985 We will nest both the
9992 \begin_inset space ~
9997 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10001 for the letter body.
10005 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10008 to preserve the depth.
10009 Remember that you need to use
10012 arg "newline-insert newline"
10015 to create multiple lines inside the
10022 \begin_inset space ~
10032 \begin_layout Right Address
10034 \begin_inset Newline newline
10037 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10038 \begin_inset Newline newline
10044 \begin_layout Address
10046 \begin_inset space ~
10052 \begin_layout Quotation
10053 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10057 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10058 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10059 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10060 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10061 as soon as possible.
10062 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10065 \begin_layout Quotation
10066 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10067 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10068 with your order, along with payment.
10071 \begin_layout Quotation
10072 We thank you again for your patience.
10075 \begin_layout Address
10077 \begin_inset Newline newline
10084 \begin_layout Quotation
10085 That ends that example!
10088 \begin_layout Standard
10089 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10090 just a few keystrokes.
10091 We could have easily nested an
10112 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10115 \begin_layout Subsection
10117 \begin_inset Index idx
10120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10121 Nesting ! Separation
10127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10129 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10136 \begin_layout Standard
10137 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10139 For example you need two different enumerations:
10142 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 \begin_layout Enumerate
10152 \begin_layout Enumerate
10156 \begin_layout --Separator--
10160 \begin_layout Itemize
10166 \begin_layout --Separator--
10170 \begin_layout Enumerate
10174 \begin_layout Enumerate
10178 \begin_layout Enumerate
10182 \begin_layout Standard
10183 To tell LyX that there are two lists an not one, set the cursor at the end
10184 of the last item and use the menu
10186 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10187 Start New Parent Environment
10190 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10191 If you use instead the menu
10193 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10194 Start New Environment
10196 a new list will also be created, but in the same besting level.
10199 \begin_layout Standard
10200 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10204 arg "paragraph-break"
10211 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar.
10214 \begin_layout Section
10215 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10216 \begin_inset Index idx
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10228 \begin_layout Standard
10229 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10230 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10231 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10232 be broken at the end of a line.
10233 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10237 \begin_layout Subsection
10239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10241 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10246 \begin_inset Index idx
10249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10258 \begin_layout Standard
10259 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10260 line at that point.
10261 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10264 \begin_layout Quote
10265 Further documentation is given in section
10266 \begin_inset Newline newline
10270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10272 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10280 \begin_layout Standard
10281 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10296 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10305 A protected space is set with
10307 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10308 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10310 \begin_inset space ~
10318 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10324 \begin_layout Subsection
10326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10328 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10333 \begin_inset Index idx
10336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10337 Spacing ! Horizontal
10345 \begin_layout Standard
10346 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10348 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10349 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10353 The length units are listed in Appendix
10354 \begin_inset space ~
10358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10360 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10371 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10376 \begin_inset Index idx
10379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10380 Spaces ! Inter-word
10388 \begin_layout Standard
10389 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10390 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10391 at the ends of sentences.
10392 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10393 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10394 followed by a period; see section
10395 \begin_inset space ~
10399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10401 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10406 To insert a normal space, select
10408 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10409 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10411 \begin_inset space ~
10419 arg "space-insert normal"
10425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10429 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10434 \begin_inset Index idx
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10446 \begin_layout Standard
10448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10455 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10464 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10465 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10466 inside abbreviations:
10469 \begin_layout Quote
10471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10475 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10478 \begin_layout Standard
10479 or between values and units.
10480 Compare for example this:
10481 \begin_inset Newline newline
10485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10489 \begin_inset Newline newline
10492 10 kg (normal space
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10498 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10499 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10501 \begin_inset space ~
10509 arg "space-insert thin"
10515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10519 \begin_layout Standard
10520 You can also insert the following space types:
10523 \begin_layout Description
10525 \begin_inset space ~
10529 \begin_inset space ~
10532 space A line with a
10533 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10537 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10541 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10544 negative thin space between the arrows.
10547 \begin_layout Description
10549 \begin_inset space ~
10553 \begin_inset space ~
10556 space A line with a
10557 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10561 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10565 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10568 negative medium space between the arrows.
10571 \begin_layout Description
10573 \begin_inset space ~
10577 \begin_inset space ~
10580 space A line with a
10581 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10585 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10589 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10592 negative thick space between the arrows.
10595 \begin_layout Description
10597 \begin_inset space ~
10601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10605 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10609 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10613 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10617 \begin_inset space ~
10621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10624 em) space between the arrows.
10627 \begin_layout Description
10629 \begin_inset space ~
10633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10637 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10641 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10645 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10649 \begin_inset space ~
10653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10656 em) space between the arrows.
10659 \begin_layout Description
10661 \begin_inset space ~
10665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10669 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10673 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10677 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10681 \begin_inset space ~
10685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10688 em) space between the arrows.
10691 \begin_layout Description
10693 \begin_inset space ~
10697 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10701 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10706 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10713 cm space between the arrows.
10716 \begin_layout Standard
10718 \begin_inset space ~
10722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10724 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10728 lists the different space sizes.
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10732 \begin_inset Float table
10737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10738 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10743 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10747 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10757 \begin_inset Tabular
10758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10759 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10761 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11036 \begin_inset Index idx
11039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11048 \begin_layout Standard
11049 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11050 in a uniform fashion.
11051 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11052 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11053 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11054 equally between themselves.
11057 \begin_layout Standard
11058 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11061 \begin_layout Quote
11063 This is on the left side
11064 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11067 This is on the right
11070 \begin_layout Quote
11073 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11077 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11083 \begin_layout Quote
11086 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11090 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11094 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11100 \begin_layout Standard
11101 That was an example in the
11107 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11111 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11115 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11118 is one in a standard paragraph.
11119 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11123 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11126 \begin_layout Standard
11127 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11130 \begin_inset space ~
11135 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11138 \begin_layout Standard
11140 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11144 \begin_inset space ~
11150 \begin_layout Standard
11152 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11156 \begin_inset space ~
11162 \begin_layout Standard
11164 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11168 \begin_inset space ~
11174 \begin_layout Standard
11176 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11180 \begin_inset space ~
11186 \begin_layout Standard
11188 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11192 \begin_inset space ~
11198 \begin_layout Standard
11200 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11204 \begin_inset space ~
11210 \begin_layout Standard
11211 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11223 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11224 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11225 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11229 option in the space dialog.
11237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11241 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11246 \begin_inset Index idx
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 \begin_layout Standard
11259 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11260 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11263 \begin_layout Standard
11264 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11267 What is correct English?:
11268 \begin_inset Newline newline
11272 \begin_inset Newline newline
11276 \begin_inset space ~
11279 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11280 \begin_inset Newline newline
11284 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11295 \begin_inset Newline newline
11299 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11310 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11316 \begin_layout Standard
11318 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11323 \begin_inset space ~
11327 \begin_inset space ~
11331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11335 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11337 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11338 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11342 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11348 \begin_inset space ~
11352 \begin_inset space ~
11356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11359 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11368 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11369 That is why it is named
11370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11378 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11379 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11383 \begin_layout Subsection
11385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11387 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11392 \begin_inset Index idx
11395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11404 \begin_layout Standard
11405 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11407 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11408 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11410 \begin_inset space ~
11416 There you find the following sizes:
11419 \begin_layout Standard
11432 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11437 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11439 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11440 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11442 \begin_inset space ~
11448 \begin_inset Index idx
11451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11452 Document ! Settings
11457 for the paragraph separation.
11458 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11469 \begin_layout Standard
11475 \begin_inset Index idx
11478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11484 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11485 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11490 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11491 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11500 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11509 s are described in section
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11516 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11525 If there are several
11529 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11530 You can therefore use
11534 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11542 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11549 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11557 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11567 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11568 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11580 \begin_layout Subsection
11581 Paragraph Alignment
11582 \begin_inset Index idx
11585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11586 Paragraph ! Alignment
11594 \begin_layout Standard
11595 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11597 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11600 dialog (toolbar button
11603 arg "layout-paragraph"
11607 There are five possibilities:
11610 \begin_layout Itemize
11618 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11624 \begin_layout Itemize
11632 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11638 \begin_layout Itemize
11646 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11652 \begin_layout Itemize
11660 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11666 \begin_layout Itemize
11674 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11681 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11682 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11683 the left and right margins.
11684 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11687 \begin_layout Standard
11689 This paragraph is right aligned,
11692 \begin_layout Standard
11694 this one is centered,
11697 \begin_layout Standard
11699 this one is left aligned.
11702 \begin_layout Subsection
11704 \begin_inset Index idx
11707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11708 Page breaks ! Forced
11714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11716 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11723 \begin_layout Standard
11724 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11725 can force a page break where you want one.
11726 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11727 Only if you use a lot of
11731 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11734 \begin_layout Standard
11735 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11736 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11740 have to change the page breaking.
11743 \begin_layout Standard
11744 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11746 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11748 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11749 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11751 \begin_inset space ~
11757 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11759 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11760 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11762 \begin_inset space ~
11767 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11769 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11770 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11773 \begin_layout Standard
11774 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11775 at the top of a page.
11776 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11777 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11778 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11779 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11783 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11787 to learn more about
11794 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11798 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11803 \begin_inset Index idx
11806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11807 Page breaks ! Clear
11815 \begin_layout Standard
11816 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11817 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11818 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11819 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11820 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11823 \begin_layout Standard
11824 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11826 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11827 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11829 \begin_inset space ~
11835 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11837 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11838 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11840 \begin_inset space ~
11844 \begin_inset space ~
11849 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11850 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11853 \begin_layout Subsection
11855 \begin_inset Index idx
11858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11867 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11874 \begin_layout Standard
11875 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11877 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11879 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11880 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset space ~
11894 arg "newline-insert newline"
11898 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11900 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11901 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11903 \begin_inset space ~
11907 \begin_inset space ~
11915 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11918 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11920 This is useful to avoid
11921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11928 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11931 \begin_layout Standard
11932 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11933 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11934 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11935 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11936 \begin_inset space ~
11940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11942 reference "sec:Quote"
11947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11949 reference "sec:Verse"
11954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11956 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11963 \begin_layout Subsection
11965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11967 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11972 \begin_inset Index idx
11975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11984 \begin_layout Standard
11986 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11997 \begin_layout Standard
12001 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12002 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12004 \begin_inset space ~
12009 you can insert horizontal lines.
12010 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12011 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12012 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12015 \begin_layout Standard
12017 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12028 \begin_layout Section
12029 Characters and Symbols
12032 \begin_layout Standard
12033 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12034 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12035 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12043 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12047 for information on how this is done.
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12051 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12056 dialog via the menu
12058 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12059 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12065 \begin_layout Standard
12066 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12075 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12076 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12084 \begin_layout Section
12085 Fonts and Text Styles
12086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12088 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12095 \begin_layout Subsection
12097 \begin_inset Index idx
12100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 There are two types of fonts:
12113 \begin_layout Description
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12119 \begin_inset Index idx
12122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12128 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12133 characters) in the font.
12134 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12135 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12136 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12137 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12138 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12139 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12140 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12141 \begin_inset Newline newline
12144 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12145 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12146 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12147 sizes than at small ones.
12148 \begin_inset Newline newline
12162 \begin_inset space ~
12170 \begin_layout Description
12172 \begin_inset space ~
12176 \begin_inset Index idx
12179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12185 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12186 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12187 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12188 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12189 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12190 image manipulation program.
12191 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12192 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12196 pixels high up to 34
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12200 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12201 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12202 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12204 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12205 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12206 \begin_inset Newline newline
12209 Bitmap fonts are named
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12217 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12220 \begin_layout Standard
12221 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12222 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12223 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12224 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12225 use scalable fonts.
12228 \begin_layout Standard
12229 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12232 \begin_layout Standard
12233 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12234 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12235 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12236 font to emphasize text, you use an
12237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12245 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12246 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12250 \begin_layout Subsection
12252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12254 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12261 \begin_layout Standard
12262 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12263 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12264 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12266 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12267 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12268 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12269 to a word processor.
12270 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12271 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12272 across different machines.
12273 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12274 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12276 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12284 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12289 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12290 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12293 \begin_layout Standard
12294 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12295 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12297 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12298 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12299 that is installed on your system.
12300 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12303 \begin_layout Standard
12304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12312 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12313 es; so you might have to experiment.
12321 \begin_layout Standard
12322 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12330 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12331 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12339 \begin_layout Subsection
12340 Document Font and Font size
12341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12343 name "sub:Document-Font"
12348 \begin_inset Index idx
12351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12358 \begin_inset Index idx
12361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12371 You can set the document fonts in the
12373 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12377 \begin_inset Index idx
12380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12381 Document ! Settings
12391 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12392 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12404 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12406 \begin_inset space ~
12409 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12412 \begin_layout Standard
12419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12428 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12429 This requires that you use
12435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12474 as the output format, i.
12475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12479 \begin_inset space \space{}
12482 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12489 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12494 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12495 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12497 \begin_inset space ~
12500 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12501 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12502 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12504 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12507 \begin_layout Standard
12508 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12513 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12518 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12519 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12526 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12545 European Computer Modern
12548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12555 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12558 \begin_layout Standard
12567 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12568 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12573 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12581 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12587 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12588 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12591 \begin_layout Itemize
12595 \begin_inset space ~
12600 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12613 \begin_inset space ~
12618 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12622 as the default font.
12623 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12624 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12627 \begin_inset space ~
12640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12641 One difference is improved kerning.
12649 \begin_layout Itemize
12653 \begin_inset space ~
12657 \begin_inset space ~
12662 fonts in (the rare) case that
12665 \begin_inset space ~
12670 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12685 Virtual means that it
12686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12697 -glyphs from other fonts.
12698 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12720 Loading the LaTeX-package
12725 \begin_inset Index idx
12728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12729 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12734 with the document preamble line
12735 \begin_inset Newline newline
12742 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12743 \begin_inset Newline newline
12748 will fix the guillemet problem.
12753 and that accented characters are not
12757 glyph, but built of
12761 characters, the accent and the letter.
12762 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12768 If you search for example for the French word
12769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12776 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12785 and not for the glyph
12786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12790 \begin_inset space ~
12794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12800 \begin_layout Itemize
12801 If you do not like the look of
12809 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12820 \begin_inset space ~
12830 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12834 serif and typewriter fonts,
12838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12839 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12846 \begin_inset space ~
12855 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12860 \begin_inset space \space{}
12868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12872 \begin_inset space \space{}
12878 \begin_inset space ~
12886 \begin_inset space ~
12896 but you can also select your own.
12897 \begin_inset Newline newline
12900 The differences between roman,
12903 \begin_inset space ~
12912 fonts are explained in section
12913 \begin_inset space ~
12917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12919 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12924 \begin_inset Newline newline
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12935 was originally designed for newspapers.
12936 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12937 into the small newspaper columns.
12941 \begin_inset space ~
12946 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12949 \begin_layout Standard
12950 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12963 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12968 depends on the class you are using.
12969 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12972 \begin_layout Standard
12973 Note that the font size is the
12978 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12979 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12980 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12989 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12996 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13003 \begin_layout Standard
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13012 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13014 \begin_inset space ~
13017 serif or typewriter.
13022 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13032 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13035 \begin_layout Standard
13044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13053 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13059 \begin_inset Index idx
13062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13063 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13069 \begin_inset space ~
13073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13075 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13080 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13081 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13088 \begin_layout Standard
13089 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13091 Use Old Style Figures
13095 Use True Small Caps
13098 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13101 Use Old Style Figures
13103 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13105 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13113 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13117 Use True Small Caps
13119 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13120 of scaled capitals.
13121 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13122 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13125 \begin_layout Standard
13130 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13131 a font to display the script characters.
13135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13136 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13141 \begin_inset Index idx
13144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13145 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13150 So this has no effect for the document language
13164 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13168 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13176 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13180 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13181 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13182 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13184 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13187 dialog, see section
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13194 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13206 \begin_layout Subsection
13210 \begin_layout Standard
13211 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13213 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13214 choose a math font in the dialog
13216 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13220 \begin_inset Index idx
13223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13224 Document ! Settings
13230 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13231 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13232 default font family
13233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13239 \begin_inset space ~
13245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13249 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13250 the document font is available.
13253 \begin_layout Standard
13254 Note that the math font will not be used for
13258 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13264 or by the insertion of the command
13271 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13272 \begin_inset space ~
13276 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13277 while the math characters do not.
13279 \begin_inset space ~
13282 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13285 \begin_inset space ~
13293 \begin_inset space ~
13298 in the document font settings.
13301 \begin_layout Standard
13302 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13303 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13310 \begin_inset space ~
13316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13319 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13327 \begin_inset space ~
13333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13339 \begin_layout Subsection
13340 Using Different Character Styles
13341 \begin_inset Index idx
13344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13351 \begin_inset Index idx
13354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13363 \begin_layout Standard
13364 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13365 certain paragraph environments.
13366 LyX supports two character styles,
13375 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13379 \begin_layout Standard
13384 style, do one of the following:
13387 \begin_layout Itemize
13388 click on the toolbar button
13397 \begin_layout Itemize
13398 use the key binding
13407 \begin_layout Standard
13408 These commands are all toggles.
13413 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13416 \begin_layout Standard
13417 One typically uses the
13421 style for proper names.
13423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13430 is the original author of LyX.
13431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13438 A more widely used character style is the
13443 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13450 \begin_layout Itemize
13451 clicking on the toolbar button
13460 \begin_layout Itemize
13461 using the keybindings
13470 \begin_layout Standard
13475 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13476 es use a different font.
13479 \begin_layout Standard
13480 We've been using the
13484 style all over the place in this document.
13485 Here's one more example:
13488 \begin_layout Quotation
13491 Do not overuse character styles!
13494 \begin_layout Standard
13495 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13496 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13497 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13498 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13502 \begin_layout Standard
13503 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13511 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13513 \begin_inset space ~
13516 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13522 arg "dialog-show character"
13528 \begin_layout Subsection
13529 Fine-Tuning with the
13534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13536 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13541 \begin_inset Index idx
13544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13553 \begin_layout Standard
13554 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13555 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13556 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13557 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13558 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13559 from ordinary dialog.
13562 \begin_layout Standard
13563 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13564 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13565 \begin_inset Newline newline
13568 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13569 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13572 \begin_layout Standard
13573 To use custom character styles, open the
13575 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13577 \begin_inset space ~
13580 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13583 dialog or press the toolbar button
13586 arg "dialog-show character"
13590 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13591 font property that you can choose.
13592 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13595 \begin_inset space ~
13600 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13605 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13606 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13607 environments all at once.
13610 \begin_layout Standard
13611 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13614 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_layout Labeling
13627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13641 The possible options are:
13645 \begin_layout Labeling
13646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13651 This is the Roman font family.
13652 Normally a serif font.
13653 It's also the default family.
13663 \begin_layout Labeling
13664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13668 \begin_inset space ~
13675 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13687 \begin_layout Labeling
13688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13695 This is the Typewriter font family.
13701 arg "font-typewriter"
13710 \begin_layout Labeling
13711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13716 This corresponds to the print weight.
13721 \begin_layout Labeling
13722 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13727 This is the Medium font series.
13728 It's also the default series.
13731 \begin_layout Labeling
13732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13739 This is the Bold font series.
13752 \begin_layout Labeling
13753 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13758 As the name implies.
13763 \begin_layout Labeling
13764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13769 This is the Upright font shape.
13770 It's also the default shape.
13773 \begin_layout Labeling
13774 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13788 s the Italic font shape
13794 \begin_layout Labeling
13795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13802 This is the Slanted font shape
13804 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13807 \begin_layout Labeling
13808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13812 \begin_inset space ~
13819 This is the Small caps font shape
13826 \begin_layout Labeling
13827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13832 Alters the text color.
13833 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13837 \begin_inset space ~
13842 , which means that the document default color set in
13844 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13845 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13851 \begin_inset space ~
13856 is used, you can choose between
13889 \begin_inset Index idx
13892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13901 \begin_layout Labeling
13902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13907 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13908 the language of the document.
13909 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13911 \begin_inset Newline newline
13914 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13915 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13916 When using the spell checking (see section
13917 \begin_inset space ~
13921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13923 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13927 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13930 \begin_layout Labeling
13931 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13936 Alters the size of the font.
13937 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13938 proportional to the document font size.
13939 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13940 what you want to do.
13945 \begin_layout Labeling
13946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13967 arg "font-size tiny"
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13995 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14001 \begin_layout Labeling
14002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14023 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14029 \begin_layout Labeling
14030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14051 arg "font-size small"
14057 \begin_layout Labeling
14058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14072 It's also the default size.
14076 arg "font-size normal"
14082 \begin_layout Labeling
14083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14104 arg "font-size large"
14110 \begin_layout Labeling
14111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14132 arg "font-size larger"
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14160 arg "font-size largest"
14166 \begin_layout Labeling
14167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14188 arg "font-size huge"
14194 \begin_layout Labeling
14195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14216 arg "font-size giant"
14222 \begin_layout Labeling
14223 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14228 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14248 arg "font-size increase"
14254 \begin_layout Labeling
14255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14260 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14280 arg "font-size decrease"
14287 \begin_layout Standard
14292 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14293 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14294 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14295 — use those instead.
14296 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14299 \begin_layout Labeling
14300 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14305 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14310 \begin_layout Labeling
14311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14318 This is text with emphasize on
14321 This might seem like the same as
14325 , but it is actually a bit different.
14331 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14333 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14344 This is text with Underbar on.
14350 arg "font-underline"
14356 \begin_inset Newline newline
14361 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14362 when you could not change fonts.
14363 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14364 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14368 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14371 \begin_layout Labeling
14372 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14376 \begin_inset space ~
14383 This is text with Double underbar on.
14389 arg "font-underunderline"
14393 \begin_inset Newline newline
14396 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14397 about double underbar.
14400 \begin_layout Labeling
14401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14405 \begin_inset space ~
14412 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14418 arg "font-underwave"
14422 \begin_inset Newline newline
14425 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14426 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14429 \begin_layout Labeling
14430 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14437 This is text with Strikeout on.
14443 arg "font-strikeout"
14447 \begin_inset Newline newline
14450 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14451 changed in the meantime.
14454 \begin_layout Labeling
14455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14462 This is text with Noun on.
14469 , this is a logical attribute.
14470 Normally it's equivalent to
14473 \begin_inset space ~
14482 \begin_layout Standard
14483 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14484 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14486 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14488 \begin_inset space ~
14491 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14497 arg "dialog-show character"
14500 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14501 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14504 arg "textstyle-apply"
14508 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14512 \begin_layout Standard
14513 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14520 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14521 (suppose you just set the shape to
14522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14540 \begin_inset space ~
14552 \begin_layout Standard
14553 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14561 \begin_inset space ~
14573 \begin_layout Itemize
14579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14586 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14604 \begin_inset Newline newline
14608 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14622 \begin_inset Note Note
14625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14626 For more on phantoms see section
14627 \begin_inset space ~
14631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14633 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14643 \begin_inset Newline newline
14649 \begin_layout Itemize
14654 fonts use characters with serifs.
14655 These are the small
14656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14663 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14664 The following example shows the difference:
14665 \begin_inset Newline newline
14669 \begin_inset Newline newline
14674 text without serifs
14677 \begin_inset Newline newline
14680 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14681 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14688 \begin_layout Itemize
14693 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14694 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14695 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14698 \begin_layout Standard
14699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14706 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14707 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14710 \begin_inset space ~
14715 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14716 the property to be removed.
14717 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14718 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14719 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14737 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14738 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14746 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14750 \begin_inset space ~
14755 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14766 If you, for example, set
14767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14790 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14799 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14802 \begin_layout Standard
14803 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14804 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14807 \begin_layout Section
14808 Printing and Previewing
14811 \begin_layout Subsection
14815 \begin_layout Standard
14816 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14817 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14818 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14819 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14820 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14822 Additional Features
14827 \begin_layout Standard
14828 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14829 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14830 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14831 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14832 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14833 This happens in two stages:
14836 \begin_layout Enumerate
14837 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14838 generating a file with the extension,
14839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14853 \begin_layout Enumerate
14854 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14858 file to produce printable output.
14861 \begin_layout Subsection
14862 Output file formats
14863 \begin_inset Index idx
14866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14875 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14883 Simple text (ASCII)
14884 \begin_inset Index idx
14887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14888 File formats ! ASCII
14896 \begin_layout Standard
14897 This file type has the extension
14898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14921 \begin_layout Standard
14922 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14924 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14925 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14927 \begin_inset space ~
14933 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14934 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14935 \begin_inset space ~
14939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14941 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14946 If your document includes such material, use
14948 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14949 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14951 \begin_inset space ~
14955 \begin_inset space ~
14959 \begin_inset space ~
14967 \begin_inset space ~
14971 \begin_inset space ~
14977 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14978 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14983 \begin_inset Index idx
14986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14987 File formats ! LaTeX
14995 \begin_layout Standard
14996 This file type has the extension
14997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15008 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15010 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15011 it manually with console commands.
15012 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15013 you view or export your document.
15016 \begin_layout Standard
15017 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15019 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15020 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15035 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15036 \begin_inset space ~
15040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15042 reference "sub:Export"
15049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15051 \begin_inset Index idx
15054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15063 \begin_layout Standard
15064 This file type has the extension
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15085 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15086 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15087 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15091 \begin_layout Standard
15092 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15093 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15094 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15095 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15096 when you view the DVI.
15097 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15100 \begin_layout Standard
15101 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15103 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15104 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15109 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15110 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15112 \begin_inset space ~
15119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15129 The latter option uses the program
15138 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15139 font access (see section
15140 \begin_inset space ~
15144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15146 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15151 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15152 standard TeX processor.
15155 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15157 \begin_inset Index idx
15160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15161 File formats ! PostScript
15169 \begin_layout Standard
15170 This file type has the extension
15171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15183 PostScript was developed by the company
15187 as a printer language.
15188 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15190 PostScript can be seen as a
15191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15194 programming language
15195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15198 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15203 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15209 \begin_inset Index idx
15212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15213 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15223 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15226 \begin_layout Standard
15227 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15231 Encapsulated PostScript
15232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15235 (EPS, file extension
15236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15248 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15249 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15250 If, for example, you have 50
15251 \begin_inset space ~
15254 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15255 \begin_inset space ~
15258 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15259 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15260 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15261 EPS to avoid this problem.
15264 \begin_layout Standard
15265 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15267 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15268 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15276 \begin_inset Index idx
15279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15286 \begin_inset Index idx
15289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15298 \begin_layout Standard
15299 This file type has the extension
15300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15316 Portable Document Format
15317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15324 was derived from PostScript.
15325 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15334 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15335 looks exactly the same.
15338 \begin_layout Standard
15339 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15343 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15347 (JPG, file extension
15348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15375 Portable Network Graphics
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15379 (PNG, file extension
15380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15392 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15393 background to one of these formats.
15394 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15395 will slow down your workflow.
15396 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15399 \begin_layout Standard
15400 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15402 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15408 \begin_layout Description
15410 \begin_inset space ~
15413 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15417 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15420 \begin_layout Description
15422 \begin_inset space ~
15429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15436 X) This uses the program
15440 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15445 is a new engine, derived from
15449 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15450 access (see section
15451 \begin_inset space ~
15455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15457 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15462 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15463 standard TeX processor.
15466 \begin_layout Description
15468 \begin_inset space ~
15475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15482 X) This uses the program
15486 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15491 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15492 font access (see section
15493 \begin_inset space ~
15497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15499 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15504 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15505 vertically written Japanese.
15508 \begin_layout Description
15510 \begin_inset space ~
15513 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15517 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15521 \begin_layout Description
15523 \begin_inset space ~
15526 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15530 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15531 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15535 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15536 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15539 \begin_layout Standard
15543 \begin_inset space ~
15552 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15553 works without problems.
15554 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15555 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15559 \begin_inset space ~
15566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15578 \begin_inset space ~
15585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15594 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15604 \begin_inset Index idx
15607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15608 FileFormats ! XHTML
15614 \begin_inset Index idx
15617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15626 \begin_layout Standard
15627 This file type has the extension
15628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15640 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15641 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15642 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15643 suitable for the purpose.
15644 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15646 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15647 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15650 between different formats, which are described in section
15652 Math Output in XHTML
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15665 \begin_layout Standard
15666 XHTML output remains
15667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15674 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15677 LyX and the World Wide Web
15681 Additional Features
15683 manual, for more information.
15686 \begin_layout Standard
15687 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15689 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15690 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15696 \begin_layout Subsection
15698 \begin_inset Index idx
15701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15710 \begin_layout Standard
15711 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15712 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15721 or use the toolbar button
15728 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15729 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15736 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15740 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15748 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15753 Further output formats can be selected via
15755 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15756 View (Other Formats)
15758 or the toolbar button
15759 \begin_inset Graphics
15760 filename ../images/view-others.png
15762 groupId toolbarbuttons
15769 \begin_layout Standard
15770 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15771 viewer window using the menu
15773 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15778 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15779 Update (Other Formats)
15784 \begin_layout Standard
15785 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15787 To have a real output, export your document.
15790 \begin_layout Subsection
15791 Printing the File from within LyX
15792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15794 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15801 \begin_layout Standard
15802 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15803 it directly from within LyX.
15804 To print a file, select the menu
15806 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15812 arg "dialog-show print"
15815 ) or click on the toolbar button
15818 arg "dialog-show print"
15822 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15823 This file is then processed by the program
15827 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15832 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15835 \begin_layout Standard
15836 You can set the following print parameters in the
15839 \begin_inset space ~
15847 \begin_layout Labeling
15848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15853 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15858 Note that this printer name is for the program
15867 has to be configured for this printer name.
15868 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15869 \begin_inset space ~
15873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15875 reference "sub:Printer"
15884 The printer should understand PostScript.
15887 \begin_layout Labeling
15888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15893 The name of a file to print to.
15894 The output will be a PostScript file.
15895 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15899 \begin_layout Standard
15900 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15901 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15902 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15903 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15904 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15905 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15906 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15909 \begin_layout Section
15910 A few Words about Typography
15911 \begin_inset Index idx
15914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15923 \begin_layout Subsection
15924 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15925 \begin_inset Index idx
15928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15935 \begin_inset Index idx
15938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15947 \begin_layout Standard
15949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15960 character comes in four lengths: the
15972 , and the minus sign:
15973 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15979 \begin_layout Standard
15980 \begin_inset Tabular
15981 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15982 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15983 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15984 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15985 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15986 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16015 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16080 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16082 \begin_inset space ~
16085 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16092 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16117 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16119 \begin_inset space ~
16122 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16143 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16177 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16183 \begin_layout Standard
16184 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16196 character multiple times in a row.
16197 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16198 the final output, but not in LyX.
16200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16230 \begin_layout Standard
16231 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16232 math mode and has a length of its own.
16233 Here are some examples:
16236 \begin_layout Enumerate
16237 line- and page-breaks
16238 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16248 \begin_layout Enumerate
16250 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16260 \begin_layout Enumerate
16261 Oh — there's a dash.
16262 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16272 \begin_layout Enumerate
16273 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16277 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16287 \begin_layout Subsection
16289 \begin_inset Index idx
16292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16301 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16308 \begin_layout Standard
16309 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16310 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16315 \begin_inset Index idx
16318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16324 following the rules of the document language.
16327 \begin_layout Standard
16328 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16333 font and with unusual constructs, like
16334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16342 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16344 This is done with the menu
16346 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16347 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16349 \begin_inset space ~
16355 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16356 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16359 \begin_layout Standard
16360 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16361 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16371 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16379 as a hyphenation possibility.
16380 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16381 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16382 as described in section
16383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16386 Prevent Hyphenation
16387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16393 \begin_inset space ~
16401 \begin_layout Subsection
16403 \begin_inset Index idx
16406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16416 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16419 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16426 \begin_layout Standard
16427 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16428 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16429 LaTeX then adds the
16430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16433 appropriate amount of space.
16434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16437 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16439 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16440 gets after another word.
16443 \begin_layout Standard
16444 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16445 not work in all cases.
16447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16458 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16459 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16462 \begin_layout Standard
16463 Here are some examples of
16467 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16470 \begin_layout Itemize
16475 \begin_layout Itemize
16480 \begin_layout Standard
16481 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16484 \begin_layout Itemize
16486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16490 this is too much space!
16493 \begin_layout Itemize
16498 \begin_layout Standard
16499 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16502 \begin_layout Standard
16503 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16506 \begin_layout Enumerate
16510 \begin_inset space ~
16515 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16516 \begin_inset space ~
16520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16522 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16527 \begin_inset Index idx
16530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16531 Spaces ! inter-word
16539 \begin_layout Enumerate
16543 \begin_inset space ~
16548 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16549 \begin_inset space ~
16553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16555 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16560 \begin_inset Index idx
16563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16572 \begin_layout Enumerate
16576 \begin_inset space ~
16580 \begin_inset space ~
16584 \begin_inset space ~
16591 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16593 \begin_inset space ~
16598 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16599 This function is also bound to
16602 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16608 \begin_layout Standard
16609 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16612 \begin_layout Itemize
16614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16618 \begin_inset space \space{}
16621 this is too much space!
16624 \begin_layout Itemize
16625 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16631 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16632 will take care of this.
16635 \begin_layout Standard
16636 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16640 \begin_inset space ~
16645 feature described in the section
16651 Additional Features
16656 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16658 \begin_inset Index idx
16661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16662 Typography ! Quotes
16668 \begin_inset Index idx
16671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16702 \begin_layout Standard
16703 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16704 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16705 and use a closing quote at the end.
16707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16715 The keyboard character,
16719 , generates this automatically.
16722 \begin_layout Standard
16723 You can specify what character the
16727 key produces using the submenu
16733 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16737 \begin_inset Index idx
16740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16741 Document ! Settings
16751 There are six choices:
16754 \begin_layout Labeling
16755 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16778 \begin_layout Labeling
16779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16782 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16786 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16792 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16796 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16802 \begin_layout Labeling
16803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16806 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16810 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16816 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16820 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16826 \begin_layout Labeling
16827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16830 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16834 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16840 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16844 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16850 \begin_layout Labeling
16851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16854 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16858 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16864 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16868 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16874 \begin_layout Labeling
16875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16878 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16882 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16888 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16892 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16898 \begin_layout Standard
16899 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16902 arg "quote-insert single"
16908 \begin_layout Subsection
16910 \begin_inset Index idx
16913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16914 Typography ! Ligatures
16920 \begin_inset Index idx
16923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16954 name "sub:Ligatures"
16961 \begin_layout Standard
16962 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16963 print them as single characters.
16964 These groups are known as
16969 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16971 Here are the standard ligatures:
16974 \begin_layout Itemize
16978 \begin_layout Itemize
16982 \begin_layout Itemize
16986 \begin_layout Itemize
16990 \begin_layout Itemize
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16995 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16998 \begin_layout Standard
16999 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17000 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17008 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17024 To break a ligature, use
17026 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17027 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17029 \begin_inset space ~
17036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17047 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17064 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17072 \begin_layout Subsection
17074 \begin_inset Index idx
17077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17086 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17093 \begin_layout Standard
17094 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17095 characters in different sizes and positions.
17096 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17097 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17117 \begin_inset Note Note
17120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17121 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17122 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17127 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17128 following proper names:
17131 \begin_layout Description
17132 LyX The name of the game, write
17133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17154 \begin_layout Description
17155 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17177 \begin_layout Description
17178 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17200 \begin_layout Description
17201 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17223 \begin_layout Standard
17224 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17229 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17237 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17238 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17239 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17242 : The actual version is
17243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17250 , the previous one was
17251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17261 \begin_layout Standard
17262 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17263 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17264 In LyX this will look like
17265 \begin_inset Graphics
17266 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17272 \begin_inset Newline newline
17275 For more about TeX Code, see section
17276 \begin_inset space ~
17280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17282 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17289 \begin_layout Subsection
17291 \begin_inset Index idx
17294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17303 \begin_layout Standard
17304 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17305 space between two words.
17306 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17316 for units use the menu
17318 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17319 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17321 \begin_inset space ~
17329 arg "space-insert thin"
17335 \begin_layout Standard
17336 Here is an example to show the differences:
17339 \begin_layout Standard
17340 \begin_inset Tabular
17341 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17342 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17343 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17344 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 \begin_inset space ~
17355 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17367 space between number and unit
17374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17383 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17395 half space between number and unit
17408 \begin_layout Subsection
17410 \begin_inset Index idx
17413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17414 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17422 \begin_layout Standard
17423 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17425 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17426 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17427 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17428 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17429 These bits of text became known as
17440 \begin_layout Standard
17441 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17442 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17443 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17444 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17445 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17446 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17447 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17448 \begin_inset Newline newline
17456 \begin_inset Newline newline
17464 \begin_inset Newline newline
17467 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17468 Some LaTeX books (such as
17469 \begin_inset space ~
17473 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17475 key "latexcompanion"
17480 \begin_inset space ~
17484 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17490 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17494 \begin_layout Chapter
17495 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17498 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17505 \begin_layout Standard
17506 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17509 \begin_inset space ~
17515 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17518 \begin_layout Section
17520 \begin_inset Index idx
17523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17539 \begin_layout Standard
17540 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17543 \begin_layout Description
17545 \begin_inset space ~
17548 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17549 \begin_inset Newline newline
17553 \begin_inset Note Note
17556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17565 \begin_layout Description
17566 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17567 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17569 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17570 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17583 \begin_inset space ~
17589 \begin_inset Newline newline
17593 \begin_inset Note Comment
17596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17597 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17605 \begin_layout Description
17607 \begin_inset space ~
17610 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17611 set in the document settings under
17613 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17615 \begin_inset space ~
17621 \begin_inset Newline newline
17625 \begin_inset Newline newline
17629 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17638 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17639 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17644 of a comment that appears in the output.
17650 \begin_inset Newline newline
17654 \begin_inset Newline newline
17657 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17660 \begin_layout Standard
17661 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17669 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17673 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17676 \begin_layout Section
17678 \begin_inset Index idx
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17690 name "sec:Footnotes"
17697 \begin_layout Standard
17698 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17701 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17704 or the toolbar button
17707 arg "footnote-insert"
17719 \begin_inset Graphics
17720 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17729 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17758 label, the box will
17762 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17763 Clicking on the box label again will close
17776 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17777 and click on the footnote
17792 \begin_layout Standard
17793 Here is an example footnote:
17801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17802 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17810 \begin_layout Standard
17811 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17812 position where the footnote box is placed.
17813 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17814 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17815 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17816 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17821 ey are described in the
17824 \begin_inset space ~
17832 \begin_layout Section
17834 \begin_inset Index idx
17837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17846 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17853 \begin_layout Standard
17854 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17855 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17857 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17859 \begin_inset space ~
17864 or the toolbar button
17867 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17893 appearing within your text.
17894 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17903 \begin_layout Standard
17904 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17908 \begin_inset Marginal
17911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17913 This is a marginal note.
17921 \begin_layout Standard
17922 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17923 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17924 pages, right on odd pages.
17927 \begin_layout Standard
17928 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17931 \begin_inset space ~
17939 \begin_inset space ~
17947 \begin_layout Section
17948 Graphics and Images
17949 \begin_inset Index idx
17952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17959 \begin_inset Index idx
17962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17971 name "sec:Graphics"
17978 \begin_layout Standard
17979 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17980 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17983 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17988 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17992 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17995 \begin_layout Standard
17996 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18001 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18002 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18004 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18005 \begin_inset space ~
18009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18011 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18018 \begin_layout Standard
18023 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18024 of the image in the output.
18025 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18029 \begin_inset space ~
18033 \begin_inset space ~
18042 \begin_inset space ~
18046 \begin_inset space ~
18050 \begin_inset space ~
18055 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18056 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18064 \begin_layout Standard
18071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18083 \begin_inset space ~
18090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18099 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18100 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18104 \begin_inset space ~
18109 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18110 with the image size is printed.
18114 \begin_inset space ~
18118 \begin_inset space ~
18122 \begin_inset space ~
18127 is explained in the
18130 \begin_inset space ~
18142 \begin_layout Standard
18143 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18144 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18146 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18149 \begin_layout Standard
18151 \begin_inset Graphics
18152 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18160 \begin_layout Standard
18161 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18162 the image into a float, see section
18163 \begin_inset space ~
18167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18169 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18176 \begin_layout Subsection
18178 \begin_inset Index idx
18181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18190 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18197 \begin_layout Standard
18198 You can insert images in any known file format.
18199 But as we explained in section
18200 \begin_inset space ~
18204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18206 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18210 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18211 LyX therefore uses the program
18215 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18216 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18217 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18224 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18231 \begin_layout Standard
18232 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18235 \begin_layout Description
18237 \begin_inset space ~
18240 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18241 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18242 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18246 Graphics Interchange Format
18247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18250 (GIF, file extension
18251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18263 \begin_inset Index idx
18266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18298 Portable Network Graphics
18299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18302 (PNG, file extension
18303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18315 \begin_inset Index idx
18318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18350 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18354 (JPG, file extension
18355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18379 \begin_inset Index idx
18382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18413 \begin_layout Description
18415 \begin_inset space ~
18418 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18420 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18421 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18422 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18423 \begin_inset Newline newline
18426 Scalable image formats can be
18427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18430 Scalable Vector Graphics
18431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18434 (SVG, file extension
18435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18447 \begin_inset Index idx
18450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18482 Encapsulated PostScript
18483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18486 (EPS, file extension
18487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18499 \begin_inset Index idx
18502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18534 Portable Document Format
18535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18538 (PDF, file extension
18539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18551 \begin_inset Index idx
18554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18569 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18570 result will not be scalable.
18571 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18577 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18585 \begin_layout Standard
18586 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18593 \begin_layout Subsection
18594 Grouping of Image Settings
18595 \begin_inset Index idx
18598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18599 Images ! Settings grouping
18607 \begin_layout Standard
18608 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18610 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18611 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18613 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18614 need to manually change each of them.
18618 \begin_layout Standard
18619 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18622 \begin_inset space ~
18626 \begin_inset space ~
18641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18649 \begin_inset space ~
18653 \begin_inset space ~
18660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18670 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18671 and checking the name of the desired group.
18674 \begin_layout Section
18676 \begin_inset Index idx
18679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18695 \begin_layout Standard
18696 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18699 arg "tabular-insert"
18704 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18708 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18709 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18710 from the rest of the table.
18711 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18712 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18714 Here is an example table:
18717 \begin_layout Standard
18719 \begin_inset Tabular
18720 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18721 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18722 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18723 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18724 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18725 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 \begin_layout Subsection
18929 \begin_layout Standard
18930 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18933 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18937 This brings up the table dialog.
18938 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18939 cursor is placed currently.
18940 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18941 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18942 done on all of your selection.
18945 \begin_layout Standard
18946 In addition to the table dialog, the
18949 \begin_inset space ~
18954 helps you in setting table properties.
18955 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18958 \begin_layout Standard
18962 \begin_inset space ~
18967 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18968 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18969 current cell respectively.
18970 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18972 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18973 of text, see section
18974 \begin_inset space ~
18978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18980 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18987 \begin_layout Standard
18988 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18989 using the check box
18998 This will merge the cells to
19002 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19003 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19004 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19005 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19006 in the last row without the upper border:
19009 \begin_layout Standard
19011 \begin_inset Tabular
19012 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19013 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19014 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19015 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19016 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19017 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19028 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19113 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19148 \begin_layout Standard
19149 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19150 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19151 explained in the chapter
19158 \begin_inset space ~
19164 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
19165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19168 degrees counterclockwise.
19169 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19172 \begin_layout Standard
19173 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19181 Most DVI-viewers are
19185 able to display rotations.
19193 \begin_layout Standard
19198 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19203 adds lines for all cell borders.
19206 \begin_layout Subsection
19208 \begin_inset Index idx
19211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19212 Tables ! Longtables
19218 \begin_inset Index idx
19221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19230 \begin_layout Standard
19231 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19234 \begin_inset space ~
19238 \begin_inset space ~
19247 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19248 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19251 \begin_layout Description
19256 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19257 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19258 except for the first page, if
19261 \begin_inset space ~
19269 \begin_layout Description
19273 \begin_inset space ~
19278 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19279 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19282 \begin_layout Description
19287 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19288 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19289 except for the last page, if
19292 \begin_inset space ~
19300 \begin_layout Description
19304 \begin_inset space ~
19309 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19310 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19313 \begin_layout Description
19314 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19315 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19317 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19321 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19324 \begin_inset space ~
19332 \begin_layout Standard
19333 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19334 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19335 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19341 In this context, first means first in this order:
19344 \begin_inset space ~
19356 \begin_inset space ~
19361 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19364 \begin_layout Standard
19366 \begin_inset Tabular
19367 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19368 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19369 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19370 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19371 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19372 <row endfirsthead="true">
19373 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19384 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19403 <row endfirsthead="true">
19404 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19415 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 <row endhead="true">
19437 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 <row endhead="true">
19468 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19479 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 <row endfoot="true">
19501 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20522 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 <row endlastfoot="true">
21483 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21520 \begin_layout Subsection
21522 \begin_inset Index idx
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21534 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21541 \begin_layout Standard
21542 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21543 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21544 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21545 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21549 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21552 \begin_layout Standard
21553 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21554 for the column in the table dialog.
21555 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21556 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21560 \begin_layout Standard
21562 \begin_inset Tabular
21563 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21564 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21566 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21656 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 This is longer now.
21717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21768 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21769 This is longer now.
21774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 \begin_layout Standard
21801 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21802 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21808 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21814 Selection with the mouse or with
21818 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21819 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21820 the selection from outside the table.
21823 \begin_layout Section
21825 \begin_inset Index idx
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21844 \begin_layout Subsection
21848 \begin_layout Standard
21849 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21850 have a fixed location.
21852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21859 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21867 \begin_inset space ~
21872 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21873 too many notes on the current page.
21876 \begin_layout Standard
21877 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21878 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21879 and pages without text.
21880 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21881 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21882 Floats are therefore numbered.
21883 Referencing is described in section
21884 \begin_inset space ~
21888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21890 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21897 \begin_layout Standard
21898 To insert a float, use the menu
21900 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21904 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21905 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21907 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21908 \begin_inset Index idx
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21917 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21918 paragraph within the float.
21919 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21920 by left-clicking on the box label.
21921 A closed float box looks like this:
21922 \begin_inset Graphics
21923 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21928 – a gray button with a red label.
21931 \begin_layout Standard
21932 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21933 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21936 \begin_layout Subsection
21938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21940 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21945 \begin_inset Index idx
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 Floats ! Figure floats
21957 \begin_layout Standard
21959 \begin_inset space ~
21963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21965 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21969 was created using the menu
21971 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21972 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21978 arg "float-insert figure"
21982 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21985 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21991 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21995 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21996 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21998 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22000 \begin_inset space ~
22008 arg "layout-paragraph"
22014 \begin_layout Standard
22015 \begin_inset Float figure
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22022 \begin_inset Graphics
22023 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22033 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22038 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22042 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22055 \begin_layout Standard
22056 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22057 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22059 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22068 ) and refer to it using the menu
22070 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22076 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22080 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22081 vague references like
22082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22089 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22099 For more about cross-references, see section
22100 \begin_inset space ~
22104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22106 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22113 \begin_layout Standard
22114 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22115 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22116 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22117 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22118 as described in section
22119 \begin_inset space ~
22123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22125 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22131 \begin_inset space ~
22135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22137 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22141 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22142 You can also set the images one below the other.
22144 \begin_inset space ~
22148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22150 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22157 reference "fig:Platypus"
22161 are the subfigures.
22164 \begin_layout Standard
22165 \begin_inset Float figure
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22175 \begin_inset Float figure
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22186 name "fig:Undefinable"
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 \begin_inset Graphics
22200 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22211 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22215 \begin_inset Float figure
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22226 name "fig:Platypus"
22238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22239 \begin_inset Graphics
22240 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22252 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22264 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22268 Two distorted images.
22281 \begin_layout Subsection
22283 \begin_inset Index idx
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 Floats ! Table floats
22295 \begin_layout Standard
22296 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22298 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22299 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22302 or the toolbar button
22305 arg "float-insert table"
22309 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22310 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22311 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22313 \begin_inset space ~
22317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22319 reference "tab:Table-float"
22326 \begin_layout Standard
22327 \begin_inset Float table
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22338 name "tab:Table-float"
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22352 \begin_inset Tabular
22353 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22354 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22356 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22357 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22508 \end{array}\right]$
22516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22529 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22550 \begin_layout Subsection
22552 \begin_inset Index idx
22555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22564 \begin_layout Standard
22565 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22566 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22567 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22569 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22577 \begin_inset space ~
22585 \begin_layout Section
22587 \begin_inset Index idx
22590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 \begin_layout Standard
22600 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22602 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22603 \begin_inset space \space{}
22610 \begin_layout Standard
22611 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22613 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22617 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22618 and its alignment within the page.
22621 \begin_layout Standard
22623 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22633 height_special "totalheight"
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 This is a minipage.
22640 The text is set in an italic style.
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22647 another formatting.
22655 \begin_layout Standard
22656 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22659 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22663 as described in section
22664 \begin_inset space ~
22668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22670 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22675 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22681 \begin_layout Standard
22682 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22692 height_special "totalheight"
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22697 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22703 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22707 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22717 height_special "totalheight"
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22722 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22730 \begin_layout Standard
22731 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22737 \begin_layout Standard
22738 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22740 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22747 \begin_inset space ~
22755 \begin_layout Chapter
22756 Mathematical Formulas
22757 \begin_inset Index idx
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 \begin_inset Index idx
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22801 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22808 \begin_layout Standard
22809 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22814 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22817 \begin_layout Section
22819 \begin_inset Index idx
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 \begin_layout Standard
22832 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22845 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22847 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22848 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22849 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22851 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22857 \begin_layout Standard
22858 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22862 \begin_inset space ~
22867 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22870 \begin_layout Standard
22871 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22872 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22875 \begin_layout Standard
22876 This is a line with an inline formula
22877 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22883 \begin_layout Standard
22884 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22885 paragraph, like this one:
22886 \begin_inset Formula
22893 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22896 \begin_layout Standard
22897 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22898 For example, typing
22899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22912 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22913 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22917 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22920 \begin_inset space ~
22928 \begin_layout Subsection
22929 Navigating in Formulas
22930 \begin_inset Index idx
22933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 \begin_layout Standard
22943 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22944 achieved with the arrow keys.
22945 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22946 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22951 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22952 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22956 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22960 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22963 \end{array}\right]$
22971 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22976 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22977 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22980 \begin_layout Standard
22985 , printed in this document as
22986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22990 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22997 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22998 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22999 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23004 For example, if you want
23005 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23013 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23023 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23027 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23032 , since in the latter case only the
23035 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23040 will be under the square root sign:
23041 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23047 \begin_layout Standard
23048 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23050 \begin_inset Formula
23052 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23061 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23062 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23065 \begin_layout Subsection
23069 \begin_layout Standard
23070 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23071 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23075 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23076 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23077 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23078 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23079 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23082 \begin_layout Subsection
23083 Exponents and Subscripts
23084 \begin_inset Index idx
23087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23094 \begin_inset Index idx
23097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 \begin_layout Standard
23107 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23110 arg "math-superscript"
23116 arg "math-subscript"
23119 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23121 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23124 , type in a formula
23127 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23137 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23143 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23147 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23153 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23159 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23168 , you have to use an extra
23172 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23173 For example, if you want
23174 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23180 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23186 Subscripts are similar: To get
23187 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23193 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23201 \begin_layout Subsection
23203 \begin_inset Index idx
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23215 \begin_layout Standard
23216 Create a fraction either with the command
23222 or by using the icon
23225 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23231 \begin_inset space ~
23237 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23238 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23239 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23244 To move back up, press
23249 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23250 \begin_inset Formula
23252 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23255 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23263 \begin_layout Subsection
23265 \begin_inset Index idx
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 \begin_layout Standard
23278 Roots can be created using the
23281 \begin_inset space ~
23289 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23295 arg "math-insert \\root"
23317 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23323 always produces a square root.
23326 \begin_layout Subsection
23327 Operators with Limits
23328 \begin_inset Index idx
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 \begin_inset Index idx
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23350 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23357 \begin_layout Standard
23359 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23363 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23366 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23367 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23368 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23369 The sum operator will automatically place its
23370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23377 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23379 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23383 \begin_inset Formula
23385 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23390 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23394 \begin_layout Standard
23395 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23397 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23398 behind the operator and using the menu
23400 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23401 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23403 \begin_inset space ~
23407 \begin_inset space ~
23421 \begin_layout Standard
23422 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23431 \begin_inset Index idx
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 \begin_inset Formula
23443 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23448 which will place the
23449 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23461 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23462 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23468 \begin_layout Standard
23469 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23476 Have a look at section
23477 \begin_inset space ~
23481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23483 reference "sub:Functions"
23487 for an explanation of function macros.
23490 \begin_layout Subsection
23492 \begin_inset Index idx
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23504 \begin_layout Standard
23505 Most math symbols can be found in the
23508 \begin_inset space ~
23513 under one of several categories; including
23530 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23534 \begin_layout Standard
23535 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23536 you don't have to use the
23539 \begin_inset space ~
23544 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23545 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23548 \begin_layout Subsection
23550 \begin_inset Index idx
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 \begin_layout Standard
23563 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23568 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23574 \begin_inset space ~
23582 arg "math-insert \\space"
23586 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23587 For example, the sequence
23592 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23596 \begin_inset Graphics
23597 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23602 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23603 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23604 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23605 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23607 Here are two examples:
23610 \begin_layout Standard
23620 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23626 \begin_layout Standard
23636 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23642 \begin_layout Subsection
23644 \begin_inset Index idx
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23656 name "sub:Functions"
23663 \begin_layout Standard
23667 \begin_inset space ~
23672 contains under the button
23675 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23678 a number of function macros, such as
23679 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23683 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23691 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23698 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23699 avoid confusions, because
23700 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23704 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23710 \begin_layout Standard
23711 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23713 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23717 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23723 \begin_layout Standard
23724 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23725 are placed, as described in section
23726 \begin_inset space ~
23730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23732 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23739 \begin_layout Subsection
23741 \begin_inset Index idx
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 \begin_layout Standard
23754 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23756 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23757 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23758 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23761 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23762 Our example is entered by typing
23767 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23774 \begin_inset space ~
23778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23780 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23784 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23787 \begin_layout Standard
23788 \begin_inset Float table
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23799 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23803 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 \begin_inset Tabular
23814 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23815 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24400 \begin_layout Standard
24401 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24404 \begin_inset space ~
24412 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24415 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24419 \begin_layout Section
24420 Brackets and Delimiters
24421 \begin_inset Index idx
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 \begin_inset Index idx
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24443 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24450 \begin_layout Standard
24451 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24452 For some purposes, using just the keys
24457 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24458 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24459 toolbar delimiter icon
24462 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24466 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24467 \begin_inset Formula
24469 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24477 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24478 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24482 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24485 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24491 \begin_inset Formula
24493 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24501 \begin_layout Standard
24502 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24503 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24507 \begin_layout Standard
24508 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24509 left side and right side.
24510 If you use the option
24513 \begin_inset space ~
24518 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24519 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24520 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24525 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24528 \begin_layout Standard
24529 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24530 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24531 is to go inside the brackets.
24532 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24537 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24538 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24539 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24543 arg "math-delim ( )"
24549 \begin_layout Section
24550 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24551 \begin_inset Index idx
24554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24561 \begin_inset Index idx
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24571 \begin_inset Index idx
24574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24575 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24583 \begin_layout Standard
24584 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24587 \begin_inset space ~
24595 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24599 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24600 Here is an example:
24601 \begin_inset Formula
24603 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24612 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24613 \begin_inset space ~
24617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24619 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24624 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24625 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24626 This alignment is set in the box
24631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24679 for every column as default.
24680 For example, the sequence
24681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24692 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24693 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24694 corresponds to the relevant column.
24695 The result will look like this:
24696 \begin_inset Formula
24699 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24700 column & has & has\, right\\
24701 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24710 \begin_layout Standard
24711 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24714 arg "newline-insert newline"
24717 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24718 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24720 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24723 or the math toolbar.
24726 \begin_layout Standard
24727 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24728 It can be created with the menu
24730 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24731 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24733 \begin_inset space ~
24745 Here is an example:
24746 \begin_inset Formula
24760 \begin_layout Standard
24761 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24764 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24767 arg "newline-insert newline"
24771 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24776 arg "newline-insert newline"
24779 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24787 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24788 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24789 A new row is created by every further entry of
24792 arg "newline-insert newline"
24796 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24797 Here is an example:
24798 \begin_inset Formula
24800 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24801 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24806 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24807 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24808 \begin_inset Formula
24810 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24818 \begin_layout Standard
24819 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24826 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24827 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24830 reference "eq:asquared"
24835 The other types are described in section
24836 \begin_inset space ~
24840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24842 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24849 \begin_layout Section
24850 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24851 \begin_inset Index idx
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 Math ! Formula numbering
24861 \begin_inset Index idx
24864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24865 Math ! Referencing formulas
24871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24873 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24880 \begin_layout Standard
24881 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24883 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24884 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24886 \begin_inset space ~
24890 \begin_inset space ~
24898 arg "math-number-toggle"
24902 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24903 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24904 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24905 the document class.
24906 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24907 separated by a dot:
24908 \begin_inset Formula
24918 arg "math-number-toggle"
24921 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24922 You can only number displayed formulas.
24925 \begin_layout Standard
24926 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24928 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24929 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24931 \begin_inset space ~
24935 \begin_inset space ~
24943 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24946 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24947 \begin_inset Formula
24950 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24956 To number all lines use the shortcut
24959 arg "math-number-toggle"
24965 \begin_layout Standard
24966 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24969 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24970 A label is inserted with the menu
24972 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24981 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24982 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24983 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24995 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24996 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24997 We inserted in the following example the label
24998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25005 in the second line:
25006 \begin_inset Formula
25008 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25009 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25014 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25015 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25016 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25018 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25020 \begin_inset space ~
25028 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25032 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25033 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25034 as the formula number:
25037 \begin_layout Standard
25038 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25041 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25048 \begin_layout Standard
25049 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25056 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25061 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25069 \begin_layout Section
25070 User defined math macros
25071 \begin_inset Index idx
25074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25083 \begin_layout Standard
25084 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25085 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25086 Math macros are explained in section
25089 \begin_inset space ~
25101 \begin_layout Section
25105 \begin_layout Subsection
25107 \begin_inset Index idx
25110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25119 \begin_layout Standard
25120 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25121 To set a font in a formula, use the
25124 \begin_inset space ~
25132 arg "math-insert \\font"
25135 , or enter its command, listed in table
25136 \begin_inset space ~
25140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25142 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25149 \begin_layout Standard
25150 \begin_inset Float table
25155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25161 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25165 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 \begin_inset Tabular
25176 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25177 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25298 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25325 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25386 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25413 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_layout Standard
25448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25472 \begin_layout Standard
25473 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25474 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25479 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25480 space when you need a space in the box.
25481 Here is an example where
25482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25493 denotes the set of numbers:
25494 \begin_inset Formula
25496 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25504 \begin_layout Standard
25505 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25506 You can, for example, put a character in
25515 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25519 \begin_inset Newline newline
25522 So it is better not to use this feature.
25525 \begin_layout Standard
25526 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25527 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25531 \begin_inset Newline newline
25534 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25540 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25541 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25547 \begin_layout Standard
25554 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25557 \begin_layout Standard
25558 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25560 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25561 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25563 \begin_inset space ~
25571 \begin_layout Subsection
25573 \begin_inset Index idx
25576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 \begin_layout Standard
25586 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25588 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25592 \begin_inset space ~
25596 \begin_inset space ~
25604 \begin_inset space ~
25612 arg "math-insert \\font"
25616 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25617 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25618 Here is an example:
25619 \begin_inset Formula
25622 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25623 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25632 \begin_layout Subsection
25634 \begin_inset Index idx
25637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25646 \begin_layout Standard
25647 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25648 automatically chosen in most situations.
25666 For most characters,
25674 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25675 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25680 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25681 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25683 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25686 arg "math-insert \\style"
25690 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25691 For example, you can set
25692 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25695 , which is normally in
25704 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25708 The four styles are used in the following example:
25711 \begin_layout Standard
25712 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25716 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25720 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25724 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25730 \begin_layout Standard
25731 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25732 is set in a particular size with the menu
25734 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25736 \begin_inset space ~
25741 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25742 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25743 will be adjusted to correspond.
25744 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25755 \begin_layout Standard
25759 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25765 \begin_layout Section
25767 \begin_inset Index idx
25770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25777 \begin_inset Index idx
25780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25789 \begin_layout Standard
25790 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25791 (AMS) that are in common use.
25794 \begin_layout Subsection
25795 Enabling AMS-Support
25798 \begin_layout Standard
25799 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25800 the document by selecting the checkbox
25803 \begin_inset space ~
25807 \begin_inset space ~
25811 \begin_inset space ~
25818 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25822 \begin_inset Index idx
25825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25826 Document ! Settings
25834 \begin_inset space ~
25840 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25841 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25844 \begin_layout Subsection
25846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25848 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25853 \begin_inset Index idx
25856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25857 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25867 LyX allows you to choose between
25888 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25889 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25895 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25898 \begin_layout Chapter
25902 \begin_layout Section
25904 \begin_inset Index idx
25907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25916 name "sec:Cross-References"
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25925 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25927 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25928 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25929 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25932 \begin_layout Enumerate
25936 \begin_layout Enumerate
25937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25939 name "enu:Second-item"
25946 \begin_layout Enumerate
25950 \begin_layout Standard
25951 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25953 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25956 or by pressing the toolbar button
25963 A gray label box like this:
25964 \begin_inset Graphics
25965 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25970 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25971 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26006 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26007 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26023 \begin_layout Standard
26024 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26026 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26029 or the toolbar button
26032 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26036 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26037 \begin_inset Graphics
26038 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26043 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26045 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26058 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26062 \begin_layout Standard
26063 As an alternative to
26065 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26068 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26073 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26074 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26076 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26088 \begin_layout Standard
26089 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26090 \begin_inset space ~
26094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26096 reference "enu:Second-item"
26103 \begin_layout Standard
26104 It is recommended to use a protected space
26108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26109 described in section
26110 \begin_inset space ~
26114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26116 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26125 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26126 line breaks between them.
26129 \begin_layout Standard
26130 There are six formats of cross-references:
26133 \begin_layout Description
26134 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26137 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26144 \begin_layout Description
26145 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26146 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26158 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26165 \begin_layout Description
26166 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26167 \begin_inset space ~
26171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26172 LatexCommand pageref
26173 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26180 \begin_layout Description
26182 \begin_inset space ~
26186 \begin_inset space ~
26189 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26191 LatexCommand vpageref
26192 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26197 \begin_inset Newline newline
26200 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26201 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26202 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26203 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26204 it prints “on the next page”.
26205 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26208 \begin_layout Description
26210 \begin_inset space ~
26214 \begin_inset space ~
26218 \begin_inset space ~
26221 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26224 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26229 \begin_inset Newline newline
26232 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26238 ; otherwise it behaves like
26242 \begin_inset space ~
26246 \begin_inset space ~
26255 \begin_layout Description
26257 \begin_inset space ~
26260 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26261 \begin_inset Newline newline
26265 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26273 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26282 \begin_inset Index idx
26285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26292 \begin_inset Index idx
26295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26296 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26307 \begin_inset Newline newline
26310 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26313 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26317 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26318 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26326 is the default and preferred because
26330 supports only English documents.
26331 The format is specified by using the command
26343 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26344 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26357 ) can be done with this command
26358 \begin_inset Newline newline
26365 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26370 \begin_inset Newline newline
26373 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26375 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26377 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26384 \begin_layout Description
26386 \begin_inset space ~
26389 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26391 LatexCommand nameref
26392 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26399 \begin_layout Standard
26400 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26401 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26402 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26406 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26410 \begin_layout Standard
26411 You can only use the style
26415 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26419 is always possible.
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26424 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26426 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26427 \begin_inset space ~
26431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26433 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26440 \begin_layout Standard
26441 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26445 \begin_inset space ~
26449 \begin_inset space ~
26454 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26455 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26458 \begin_inset space ~
26463 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26464 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26467 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26473 \begin_layout Standard
26474 You can change labels at any time.
26475 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26476 do not need to think about this.
26479 \begin_layout Standard
26480 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26481 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26482 instead of the reference.
26485 \begin_layout Standard
26486 References are described in detail in the section
26487 \begin_inset space ~
26491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26501 \begin_inset space ~
26509 \begin_layout Section
26510 Table of Contents and other Listings
26511 \begin_inset Index idx
26514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26521 \begin_inset Index idx
26524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26540 \begin_layout Subsection
26542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26544 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26551 \begin_layout Standard
26552 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26554 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26555 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26557 \begin_inset space ~
26561 \begin_inset space ~
26567 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26568 If you click on it, the
26572 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26573 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26574 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26576 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26578 \begin_inset space ~
26583 that is described in section
26584 \begin_inset space ~
26588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26590 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26597 \begin_layout Standard
26598 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26599 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26601 \begin_inset space ~
26605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26607 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26611 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26613 \begin_inset space ~
26617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26619 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26623 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26625 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26628 \begin_layout Subsection
26629 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26632 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26639 \begin_layout Standard
26640 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26642 You can insert them via the
26644 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26648 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26651 \begin_layout Section
26652 URLs and Hyperlinks
26653 \begin_inset Index idx
26656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26663 \begin_inset Index idx
26666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26675 \begin_layout Subsection
26677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26686 \begin_layout Standard
26687 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26689 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26695 \begin_layout Standard
26696 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26697 \begin_inset Flex URL
26700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26710 \begin_layout Standard
26711 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26717 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26721 \begin_layout Standard
26722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26730 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26738 \begin_layout Subsection
26740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26742 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26749 \begin_layout Standard
26750 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26752 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26755 or with the toolbar button
26762 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26771 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26772 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26773 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26775 name "LyX's homepage"
26776 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26780 , an Email address like this:
26781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26783 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26784 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26789 , or a link to a file.
26792 \begin_layout Standard
26793 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26806 to the link target.
26809 \begin_layout Standard
26810 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26811 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26812 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26813 the text style dialog.
26814 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26818 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26820 name "LyX's homepage"
26821 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26828 \begin_layout Standard
26829 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26833 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26835 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26836 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26840 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26842 \begin_inset Newline newline
26850 \begin_inset Newline newline
26857 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26860 \begin_layout Section
26862 \begin_inset Index idx
26865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26874 name "sec:Appendices"
26881 \begin_layout Standard
26882 Appendices are created with the menu
26884 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26886 \begin_inset space ~
26890 \begin_inset space ~
26896 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26897 as the appendix part of the book.
26898 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26901 \begin_layout Standard
26902 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26903 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26904 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26905 and the subsection number.
26906 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26910 \begin_layout Standard
26912 \begin_inset space ~
26916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26918 reference "chap:Credits"
26923 \begin_inset space ~
26927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26929 reference "sub:Export"
26936 \begin_layout Section
26938 \begin_inset Index idx
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26950 name "sec:Bibliography"
26957 \begin_layout Standard
26958 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26959 You can include a bibliography database,
26963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26964 Known under the name
26965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26977 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26978 manually, using the paragraph environment
26982 , which was described in section
26983 \begin_inset space ~
26987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26989 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26994 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26995 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26999 use a bibliography database.
27002 \begin_layout Subsection
27003 The Bibliography Environment
27006 \begin_layout Standard
27011 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27013 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27022 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27024 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27033 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27036 \begin_layout Standard
27037 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27039 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27042 or the toolbar button
27045 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27049 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27050 containing the available citations.
27051 Select one or more keys from the list and
27061 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27062 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27066 \begin_layout Standard
27067 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27068 entry with surrounding brackets.
27073 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27074 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27086 \begin_layout Standard
27089 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27092 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27094 key "latexcompanion"
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27103 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27112 \begin_layout Standard
27113 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27116 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27118 \begin_inset space ~
27126 arg "layout-paragraph"
27130 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27133 \begin_layout Subsection
27134 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27135 \begin_inset Index idx
27138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27139 Bibliography ! Databases
27145 \begin_inset Index idx
27148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27149 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27157 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27164 \begin_layout Standard
27165 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27171 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27173 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27174 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27179 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27181 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27182 your working field in a database.
27183 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27184 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27185 list for that document.
27186 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27190 \begin_layout Standard
27191 The database is a text file with the file extension
27192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27203 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27204 The format is explained in
27205 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27211 and in the LaTeX books (
27212 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27214 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27219 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27220 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27221 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27222 \begin_inset Flex URL
27225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27227 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27235 \begin_layout Standard
27236 To use a database, use the menu
27238 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27243 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27256 \begin_inset space ~
27262 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27263 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27270 Add bibliography to TOC
27272 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27277 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27278 in the document or just the cited references.
27281 \begin_layout Standard
27282 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27294 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27295 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27296 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27298 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27304 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27305 \begin_inset Newline newline
27309 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27311 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27323 \begin_layout Standard
27324 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27327 \begin_layout Standard
27328 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27329 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27335 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27336 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27341 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27342 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27343 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27358 The following variants are possible:
27361 \begin_layout Description
27362 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27363 with other bibliography packages (e.
27364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27368 \begin_inset space \space{}
27375 ), only with the package
27379 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27383 \begin_layout Description
27384 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27385 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27386 with all bibliography packages, except
27391 \begin_layout Description
27392 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27397 , works with all bibliography packages
27400 \begin_layout Standard
27401 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27403 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27409 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27418 \begin_layout Standard
27419 When you select the option
27421 Sectioned bibliography
27425 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27426 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27429 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27430 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27432 Customizing Bibliographies
27440 Additional Features
27445 \begin_layout Standard
27446 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27447 the two methods of creating them.
27448 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27449 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27450 We used the style file
27454 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27457 \begin_layout Subsection
27458 Bibliography layout
27459 \begin_inset Index idx
27462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27463 Bibliography ! Layout
27471 \begin_layout Standard
27472 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27473 For this feature you need to enable the option
27479 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27483 \begin_inset Index idx
27486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27487 Document ! Settings
27497 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27498 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27499 in the previous section.
27502 \begin_layout Standard
27503 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27504 the citation reference window.
27505 Here is an example where the text
27506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27510 \begin_inset space ~
27514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27517 appears after the reference:
27520 \begin_layout Standard
27522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27525 key "latexcompanion"
27532 \begin_layout Section
27534 \begin_inset Index idx
27537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27553 \begin_layout Standard
27554 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27556 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27558 \begin_inset space ~
27563 or the toolbar button
27570 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27571 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27572 by LyX as the index entry.
27575 \begin_layout Standard
27576 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27578 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27579 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27581 \begin_inset space ~
27587 A light blue box labeled
27588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27599 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27600 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27603 \begin_layout Standard
27604 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27605 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27609 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27616 \begin_layout Subsection
27617 Grouping Index Entries
27618 \begin_inset Index idx
27621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27630 \begin_layout Standard
27631 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27633 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27634 lists under the entry
27635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27643 First we create the entry
27644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27652 \begin_inset space ~
27656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27658 reference "sub:Lists"
27663 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27664 \begin_inset space ~
27668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27670 reference "sec:Itemize"
27674 , we insert the command
27677 \begin_layout Standard
27683 \begin_layout Standard
27687 \begin_layout Standard
27693 \begin_layout Standard
27694 for the enumerated list in section
27695 \begin_inset space ~
27699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27701 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27708 \begin_layout Standard
27709 The exclamation mark
27710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27717 marks the grouping levels.
27718 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27719 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27720 If we don't have an index entry for
27721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27728 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27731 \begin_layout Subsection
27733 \begin_inset Index idx
27736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27737 Index ! Page ranges
27745 \begin_layout Standard
27746 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27748 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27749 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27750 an index entry in section
27751 \begin_inset space ~
27755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27757 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27764 \begin_layout Standard
27767 Paragraph environments|(
27770 \begin_layout Standard
27771 and another entry at the end of section
27772 \begin_inset space ~
27776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27778 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27785 \begin_layout Standard
27788 Paragraph environments|)
27791 \begin_layout Standard
27793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27816 respectively start and end the index range.
27817 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27818 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27819 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27820 An example is the index entry
27821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27824 Document ! Settings
27825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27831 \begin_layout Subsection
27833 \begin_inset Index idx
27836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27837 Index ! Cross referencing
27845 \begin_layout Standard
27846 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27847 We referred for example in the index entry
27848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27856 \begin_inset space ~
27860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27862 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27866 ) to the index entry
27867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27874 in the same section using the entry
27877 \begin_layout Standard
27880 GIF|see{Image formats}
27883 \begin_layout Standard
27884 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27885 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27886 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27889 \begin_layout Subsection
27891 \begin_inset Index idx
27894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27895 Index ! Entry order
27903 \begin_layout Standard
27904 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27905 follow the rules for the index order.
27906 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27911 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27913 \begin_inset space ~
27917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27919 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27928 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27929 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27954 \begin_inset Index idx
27957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27958 Dummy entries ! maïs
27964 \begin_inset Index idx
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27968 Dummy entries ! maître
27974 \begin_inset Index idx
27977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27978 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27983 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27984 maïs, maison, maître.
27985 To achieve this, we use the command
27988 \begin_layout Standard
27991 previous entry@current entry
27994 \begin_layout Standard
27995 In our case we want to have
27996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28011 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28014 \begin_layout Standard
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28021 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28022 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28023 See the next subsection for an example.
28026 \begin_layout Standard
28027 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28034 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28039 to generate the index (see sec.
28040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28046 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28055 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28063 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28067 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28068 index commands start with
28069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28081 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28086 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28089 \begin_layout Standard
28101 \begin_layout Standard
28113 \begin_layout Subsection
28115 \begin_inset Index idx
28118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28119 Index ! Entry layout
28127 \begin_layout Standard
28128 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28129 \begin_inset Index idx
28132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 This is an italic dummy entry
28140 You can also format the page number using the character
28141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28148 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28149 We can write for example
28152 \begin_layout Standard
28155 italic page number:|textit
28158 \begin_layout Standard
28159 to get the page number in italic.
28160 \begin_inset Index idx
28163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28164 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28169 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28187 \begin_inset space ~
28193 Have a look at section
28194 \begin_inset space ~
28198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28200 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28204 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28207 \begin_layout Standard
28208 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28216 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28220 to generate the index, see sec.
28221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28227 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28236 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28241 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28242 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28245 key "latexcompanion"
28257 \begin_layout Standard
28258 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28260 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28261 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28262 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28263 If so, put the following in the preamble
28266 \begin_layout Standard
28278 \begin_layout Standard
28282 \begin_layout Standard
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28289 in the index entry.
28290 \begin_inset Index idx
28293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28294 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28299 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28300 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28301 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28305 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28306 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28307 a bold font for all index entries.
28308 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28320 documentation for details,
28321 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28323 key "makeindex,xindy"
28330 \begin_layout Subsection
28332 \begin_inset Index idx
28335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28344 name "sub:Index-Program"
28351 \begin_layout Standard
28352 If the index generation program
28356 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28360 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28369 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28370 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28371 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28372 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28373 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28383 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28384 dialog, see section
28385 \begin_inset space ~
28389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28391 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28396 The available options are listed and explained in
28397 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28399 key "makeindex,xindy"
28404 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28408 \begin_layout Standard
28409 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28410 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28413 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28414 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28418 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28419 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28422 \begin_layout Subsection
28426 \begin_layout Standard
28427 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28428 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28436 next to the standard index.
28437 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28438 that add this feature.
28444 \begin_inset Index idx
28447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28448 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28453 package to generate multiple indexes.
28454 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28459 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28460 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28467 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28468 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28469 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28477 \begin_layout Standard
28478 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28480 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28481 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28484 and select the option
28486 Use multiple Indexes
28493 already contains the standard index
28494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28502 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28503 also appear as a heading) to the
28507 input field and press the
28512 The new index now also appears in the list.
28513 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28521 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28528 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28529 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28530 are additional features:
28533 \begin_layout Itemize
28534 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28535 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28538 \begin_layout Itemize
28539 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28540 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28548 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28549 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28550 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28551 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28554 \begin_layout Section
28555 Nomenclature/Glossary
28556 \begin_inset Index idx
28559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28566 \begin_inset Index idx
28569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28600 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28607 \begin_layout Standard
28608 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28609 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28610 called nomenclature or glossary.
28613 \begin_layout Standard
28614 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28620 \begin_inset Index idx
28623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28624 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28630 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28637 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28640 \begin_layout Standard
28641 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28642 and then use the menu
28644 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28650 \begin_inset space ~
28655 or the toolbar button
28658 arg "nomencl-insert"
28663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28674 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28677 \begin_layout Standard
28678 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28679 The first is the term or
28683 that you wish to define.
28688 of the term or symbol.
28691 \begin_layout Standard
28692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28700 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28708 \begin_layout Subsection
28709 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28710 \begin_inset Index idx
28713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28714 Nomenclature ! Layout
28722 \begin_layout Standard
28723 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28727 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28733 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28741 \begin_inset Newline newline
28749 \begin_inset Newline newline
28755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28762 character starts/ends the formula.
28763 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28775 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28785 \begin_layout Standard
28786 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28787 \begin_inset space ~
28791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28793 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28800 \begin_layout Standard
28804 \begin_inset space ~
28809 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28810 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28815 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28822 in this document is:
28823 \begin_inset Newline newline
28828 dummy entry for the character
28833 \begin_inset Newline newline
28845 \begin_inset space ~
28855 font use the command
28884 \begin_layout Standard
28885 If the characters |
28886 \begin_inset space \space{}
28890 \begin_inset space \space{}
28894 \begin_inset space \space{}
28898 \begin_inset space \space{}
28902 \begin_inset space \space{}
28905 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28906 a quote character in front of them.
28907 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28908 LatexCommand nomenclature
28909 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28910 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28917 \begin_layout Subsection
28918 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28919 \begin_inset Index idx
28922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28923 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28931 \begin_layout Standard
28932 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28933 the symbol definition.
28934 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28936 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28939 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28940 LatexCommand nomenclature
28942 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28949 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28953 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28954 LatexCommand nomenclature
28957 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28962 They will be sorted by
28963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28989 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28992 will be sorted before the
28996 since the character
28997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29004 is considered in sorting.
29007 \begin_layout Standard
29008 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29011 \begin_inset space ~
29016 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29017 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29019 For the example given, you can insert
29023 in this field for the
29024 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29031 will be located before
29032 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29038 \begin_layout Standard
29039 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29053 \begin_layout Subsection
29054 Nomenclature Options
29055 \begin_inset Index idx
29058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29059 Nomenclature ! Options
29067 \begin_layout Standard
29072 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29073 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29076 \begin_layout Description
29077 refeq Appends the phrase
29078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29093 to every nomenclature entry, where
29099 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29102 \begin_layout Description
29103 refpage Appends the phrase
29104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29119 to every nomenclature entry, where
29125 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29128 \begin_layout Description
29129 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29132 \begin_layout Standard
29133 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29134 class options list in the
29136 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29140 In this document the options
29147 \begin_layout Standard
29148 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29154 \begin_layout Standard
29155 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29156 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29161 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29164 \begin_layout Description
29174 \begin_layout Description
29177 nomrefpage Like the
29184 \begin_layout Description
29187 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29196 \begin_layout Description
29200 \begin_inset space ~
29206 \begin_inset space ~
29211 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29214 \begin_layout Standard
29216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29223 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29224 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29227 \begin_layout Standard
29235 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29238 \begin_inset Newline newline
29245 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29250 \begin_inset Newline newline
29254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29269 by their translation.
29272 \begin_layout Subsection
29273 Printing the Nomenclature
29274 \begin_inset Index idx
29277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29278 Nomenclature ! Printing
29286 \begin_layout Standard
29287 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29289 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29290 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29306 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29307 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29308 You can choose between these settings:
29311 \begin_layout Description
29312 Default a space of 1
29313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29319 \begin_layout Description
29321 \begin_inset space ~
29325 \begin_inset space ~
29328 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29331 \begin_layout Description
29332 Custom custom space
29335 \begin_layout Standard
29336 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29345 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29353 For example, in order to change the name to
29357 , add the following line to the preamble:
29360 \begin_layout Standard
29368 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29371 \begin_layout Subsection
29372 Nomenclature Program
29373 \begin_inset Index idx
29376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29377 Nomenclature ! Program
29383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29385 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29392 \begin_layout Standard
29393 LyX uses the program
29397 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29398 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29403 by adding options, see section
29404 \begin_inset space ~
29408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29410 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29415 The available options are listed and explained in
29416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29418 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29425 \begin_layout Section
29427 \begin_inset Index idx
29430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29437 \begin_inset Index idx
29440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29441 Document ! Branches
29447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29449 name "sec:Branches"
29456 \begin_layout Standard
29457 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29458 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29459 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29460 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29463 \begin_layout Standard
29464 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29465 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29466 To create a branch, either select the menu
29468 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29469 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29472 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29474 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29481 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29482 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29483 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29484 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29485 (see below for an example).
29486 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29487 to the name of the other) and to add
29488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29500 \begin_inset space ~
29503 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29504 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29507 \begin_layout Standard
29508 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29509 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29511 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29514 where you can choose a branch.
29515 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29519 \begin_layout Standard
29520 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29521 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29525 \begin_inset Branch Question
29528 \begin_layout Standard
29529 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29538 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29541 \begin_layout Standard
29542 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29550 \begin_layout Standard
29557 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29558 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29561 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29562 Consider for example a file
29563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29570 which has the above branches.
29572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29579 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29603 branch were inactive,
29604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29619 branch was active, likewise
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29635 branch was active, and
29636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29639 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29643 if both branches were active.
29644 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29647 \begin_layout Standard
29648 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29654 \begin_layout Standard
29655 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29656 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29658 For example you can define for the question branch
29662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29663 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29664 \begin_inset space ~
29668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29670 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29682 \begin_layout Standard
29692 \begin_layout Standard
29702 \begin_layout Standard
29703 and for the answer branch
29706 \begin_layout Standard
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29726 \begin_layout Standard
29727 \begin_inset Branch Question
29730 \begin_layout Standard
29734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29762 \begin_layout Standard
29763 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29766 \begin_layout Standard
29770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29798 \begin_layout Standard
29799 Now it is possible to use the
29803 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29810 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29813 commands to obtain conditional output.
29814 Here is an example formula where only the
29821 \begin_inset Formula
29823 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29831 \begin_layout Standard
29832 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29840 \begin_layout Standard
29841 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29847 \begin_inset space \space{}
29850 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29851 For this advanced usage, see the
29856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29859 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29866 \begin_layout Section
29868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29870 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29875 \begin_inset Index idx
29878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29887 \begin_layout Standard
29890 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29891 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29894 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29896 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29901 \begin_inset Index idx
29904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29905 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29910 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29911 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29912 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29913 part of the document.
29917 \begin_layout Standard
29918 The header information in the dialog tab
29922 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29923 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29924 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29925 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29933 \begin_inset space ~
29938 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29939 title and author entries.
29943 \begin_inset space ~
29947 \begin_inset space ~
29951 \begin_inset space ~
29956 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29959 \begin_layout Standard
29960 You can specify in the dialog tab
29964 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29969 \begin_inset space ~
29973 \begin_inset space ~
29977 \begin_inset space ~
29982 option allows long links to be split;
29985 \begin_inset space ~
29989 \begin_inset space ~
29993 \begin_inset space ~
30001 \begin_inset space ~
30006 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30009 \begin_inset space ~
30014 colors the different links.
30015 The default colors are:
30018 \begin_layout Labeling
30019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30024 for hyperlinks and URLs
30027 \begin_layout Labeling
30028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30036 \begin_layout Labeling
30037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30045 \begin_layout Standard
30046 but you can change these in the field
30051 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30054 \begin_layout Standard
30057 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30060 \begin_layout Standard
30065 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30066 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30067 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30070 \begin_layout Standard
30075 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30076 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30077 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30087 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30088 when opening the PDF.
30090 \begin_inset space ~
30093 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30094 \begin_inset space ~
30097 1 will only display the sections.
30100 \begin_layout Standard
30101 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30102 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30108 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30109 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30118 \begin_layout Section
30119 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30122 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30129 \begin_layout Subsection
30131 \begin_inset Index idx
30134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30143 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30150 \begin_layout Standard
30151 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30152 constructs, but not all.
30153 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30154 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30155 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30156 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30157 and their commands.
30160 \begin_layout Standard
30161 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30163 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30165 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30178 \begin_inset space ~
30183 or by the toolbar button
30196 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30204 \begin_layout Standard
30205 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30206 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30207 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30208 using the LaTeX-command
30214 , you can write the command part
30220 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30224 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30225 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30226 the following example:
30229 \begin_layout Standard
30230 \begin_inset Graphics
30231 filename clipart/ERT.png
30239 \begin_layout Standard
30243 \begin_layout Standard
30244 This is a line with a
30248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30271 \begin_layout Standard
30272 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30280 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30281 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30289 \begin_layout Subsection
30290 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30291 \begin_inset Argument 1
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30301 \begin_inset Index idx
30304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30313 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30320 \begin_layout Standard
30321 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30322 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30323 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30332 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30333 any time if you know the right commands.
30334 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30335 is the end of the day.
30336 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30337 all caption labels bold.
30338 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30340 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30344 \begin_layout Standard
30345 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30346 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30347 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30349 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30358 \begin_layout Standard
30359 As result you find that the package
30364 \begin_inset Index idx
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30374 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30376 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30379 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30394 \begin_inset space ~
30402 \begin_layout Standard
30407 usepackage[options]{package name}
30410 \begin_layout Standard
30411 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30412 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30413 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30416 \begin_layout Standard
30417 In your case the package name is
30422 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30427 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30428 So you add the command
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30436 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30439 \begin_layout Standard
30440 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30445 For more commands provided by the
30449 package, have a look at its documentation,
30450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30465 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30467 For example if you use a
30471 class, you don't need the package
30475 , you can instead write
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30483 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30488 \begin_layout Standard
30489 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30490 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30491 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30498 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30501 \begin_layout Standard
30502 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30503 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30505 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30506 the previous section.
30509 \begin_layout Standard
30510 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30514 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30522 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30528 \begin_layout Standard
30532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30542 \begin_inset Note Note
30545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30546 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30554 \begin_layout Left Header
30555 \begin_inset Argument 1
30558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30578 \begin_inset Note Note
30581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30582 defines the header line as described below
30590 \begin_layout Center Header
30591 \begin_inset Argument 1
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30603 \begin_layout Right Header
30604 \begin_inset Argument 1
30607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30628 \begin_layout Left Footer
30629 \begin_inset Argument 1
30632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30653 \begin_layout Center Footer
30654 \begin_inset Argument 1
30657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30668 \begin_inset Newline newline
30672 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30678 \begin_layout Right Footer
30679 \begin_inset Argument 1
30682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30704 \begin_layout Section
30705 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30708 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30713 \begin_inset Index idx
30716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 Document ! Header/Footer line
30723 \begin_inset Index idx
30726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30735 \begin_layout Standard
30736 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30740 \begin_inset space ~
30751 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30757 \begin_inset space ~
30763 As a second step add in the menu
30765 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30766 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30773 Custom Header/Footerlines
30774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30778 This module offers the following 6
30779 \begin_inset space ~
30785 \begin_layout Description
30787 \begin_inset space ~
30791 \begin_inset space ~
30795 \begin_inset space ~
30799 \begin_inset space ~
30803 \begin_inset space ~
30809 \begin_layout Description
30811 \begin_inset space ~
30815 \begin_inset space ~
30819 \begin_inset space ~
30823 \begin_inset space ~
30827 \begin_inset space ~
30833 \begin_layout Standard
30834 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30837 \begin_layout Standard
30838 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30839 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30841 \begin_inset space ~
30845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30847 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30851 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30854 \begin_layout Standard
30855 \begin_inset Float figure
30861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30864 \begin_inset Tabular
30865 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30866 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30867 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30869 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30871 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30900 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30918 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30933 The normal text on the page goes here.
30934 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30936 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30937 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30942 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30951 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30962 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30980 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30991 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31009 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31027 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31032 name "fig:Page-layout"
31036 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31049 \begin_layout Standard
31050 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31058 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31062 \begin_inset space ~
31067 is set to “Default”.
31068 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31077 \begin_layout Subsection
31081 \begin_layout Standard
31082 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31083 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31084 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31085 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31087 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31088 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31091 \begin_layout Standard
31092 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31095 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31108 \begin_inset space ~
31116 \begin_layout Description
31119 thepage prints the current page number
31122 \begin_layout Description
31125 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31128 \begin_layout Description
31131 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31134 \begin_layout Description
31137 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31138 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31145 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31148 because it usually goes in a left header.
31151 \begin_layout Description
31154 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31155 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31157 It is normally used in the right header.
31160 \begin_layout Subsection
31161 Default header/footer
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31166 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31167 footer has the page number.
31168 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31169 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31170 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31173 \begin_inset space ~
31181 \begin_layout Subsection
31185 \begin_layout Standard
31186 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31187 Some pages are different.
31188 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31189 a new part or chapter in your book.
31190 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31191 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31192 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31196 Header and footer decoration line
31199 \begin_layout Standard
31200 By default, you get a 0.4
31201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31204 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31205 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31217 in the following way:
31220 \begin_layout Standard
31227 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31230 \begin_layout Standard
31231 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31240 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31247 \begin_layout Standard
31248 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31249 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31250 \begin_inset space ~
31254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31264 Several header/footer lines
31267 \begin_layout Standard
31268 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31269 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31270 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31272 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31286 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31287 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31300 \begin_inset space ~
31308 \begin_layout Standard
31315 headheight}{height}
31318 \begin_layout Standard
31319 where height is a size in standard units.
31320 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31321 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31322 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31324 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31341 \begin_inset space ~
31346 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31351 \begin_inset Index idx
31354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31355 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31361 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31362 for your header/footer.
31365 \begin_layout Subsection
31369 \begin_layout Standard
31370 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31371 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31372 This example consists of the following definition:
31375 \begin_layout Description
31377 \begin_inset space ~
31386 , empty optional argument
31389 \begin_layout Description
31391 \begin_inset space ~
31394 Header empty, empty optional argument
31397 \begin_layout Description
31399 \begin_inset space ~
31408 in the optional argument
31411 \begin_layout Description
31413 \begin_inset space ~
31422 in the optional argument
31425 \begin_layout Description
31427 \begin_inset space ~
31439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31443 \begin_inset Newline newline
31447 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31454 in the optional argument
31457 \begin_layout Description
31459 \begin_inset space ~
31468 , empty optional argument
31471 \begin_layout Description
31474 headrulewidth set to 2
31475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31481 \begin_layout Standard
31482 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31483 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31489 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31498 \begin_layout Standard
31499 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31505 \begin_layout Standard
31509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31513 pagestyle{headings}
31519 \begin_inset Note Note
31522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31523 switches back to page style with the default headings
31531 \begin_layout Section
31532 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31535 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31540 \begin_inset Index idx
31543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31550 \begin_inset Index idx
31553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31562 \begin_layout Standard
31563 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31564 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31565 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31568 \begin_layout Subsection
31572 \begin_layout Standard
31573 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31578 \begin_inset Index idx
31581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31582 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31587 (on some systems named simply
31592 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31600 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31601 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31609 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31610 automatically installed together with LyX.
31613 \begin_layout Subsection
31617 \begin_layout Standard
31618 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31619 LaTeX, activate the option
31622 \begin_inset space ~
31629 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31635 \begin_inset space ~
31639 \begin_inset space ~
31642 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31649 \begin_inset space ~
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31667 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31671 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31675 \begin_inset space ~
31683 \begin_inset space ~
31691 \begin_layout Standard
31692 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31696 \begin_layout Standard
31697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31705 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31706 generated by activating the option
31709 \begin_inset space ~
31715 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31723 \begin_layout Subsection
31724 Selected document parts
31727 \begin_layout Standard
31728 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31729 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31730 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31731 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31733 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31737 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31738 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31739 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31742 \begin_layout Standard
31743 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31749 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31760 is explained in section
31762 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31767 \begin_inset space ~
31777 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31778 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31780 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31782 Here is the result:
31785 \begin_layout Standard
31786 \begin_inset Preview
31788 \begin_layout Standard
31793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31797 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31803 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31813 height_special "totalheight"
31816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31841 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31847 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31869 \begin_layout Standard
31870 Previewing works also for colors.
31871 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31889 is explained in section
31896 \begin_inset space ~
31909 \begin_layout Standard
31910 \begin_inset Preview
31912 \begin_layout Standard
31916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31935 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31940 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31959 \begin_layout Standard
31960 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31966 \begin_layout Standard
31967 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31968 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31969 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31971 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31972 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31973 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31974 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31978 \begin_layout Subsection
31982 \begin_layout Standard
31983 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31986 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31988 \begin_inset space ~
31993 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31994 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31996 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31997 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31998 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31999 the source view window.
32004 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32005 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32006 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32009 \begin_layout Section
32010 Advanced Find and Replace
32011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32013 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32018 \begin_inset Index idx
32021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32028 \begin_inset Index idx
32031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32040 \begin_layout Subsection
32044 \begin_layout Standard
32045 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32046 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32047 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32048 The key-features are:
32051 \begin_layout Itemize
32052 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32053 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32054 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32058 \begin_layout Itemize
32059 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32060 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32061 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32062 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32065 \begin_layout Itemize
32066 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32067 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32068 outside of mathematics environments
32071 \begin_layout Itemize
32072 Search may be widened to a specific
32077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32081 \begin_inset space ~
32084 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32085 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32092 \begin_layout Itemize
32093 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32094 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32099 \begin_inset space ~
32102 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32105 \begin_layout Subsection
32109 \begin_layout Standard
32110 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32112 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32125 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32128 ) or the toolbar button
32131 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32137 Advanced Find and Replace
32142 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32146 \begin_layout Standard
32151 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32155 \begin_inset space ~
32160 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32163 arg "paragraph-break"
32167 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32168 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32172 arg "paragraph-break"
32175 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32179 searches backwards.
32182 \begin_layout Standard
32186 \begin_inset space ~
32191 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32200 \begin_inset space ~
32205 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32208 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32209 Searching for mathematics
32212 \begin_layout Standard
32213 Mathematical formulas, such as
32214 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32217 or something more complex like
32218 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32221 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32226 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32227 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32228 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32229 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32240 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32241 This is done by switching to the
32245 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32250 This way, entering in the
32257 \begin_layout Itemize
32258 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32259 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32262 \begin_layout Itemize
32263 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32264 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32267 \begin_layout Itemize
32268 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32269 of it only within section headings.
32270 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32271 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32275 \begin_layout Itemize
32276 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32277 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32280 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32284 \begin_layout Standard
32285 The entries made in the
32289 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32292 \begin_inset space ~
32298 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32302 button or alternatively press
32305 arg "paragraph-break"
32312 while the cursor is in the
32315 \begin_inset space ~
32323 \begin_layout Standard
32324 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32325 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32329 \begin_layout Itemize
32330 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32331 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32339 with its typewriter version
32340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32354 \begin_layout Itemize
32355 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32361 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32373 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32380 (you may want to enable the
32383 \begin_inset space ~
32391 \begin_inset space ~
32396 options and disable the
32404 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32412 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32413 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32417 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32420 , or occurrences of
32421 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32425 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32431 \begin_layout Subsection
32435 \begin_layout Standard
32436 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32441 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32445 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32454 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32460 This is done with the context menu
32462 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32463 Insert Regular Expression
32465 while the cursor is in the
32470 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32471 expression matching rules
32475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32476 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32482 \begin_inset space ~
32485 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32486 to match expressions.
32491 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32492 same text in the document.
32493 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32494 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32497 \begin_layout Enumerate
32498 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32503 editor the fraction
32504 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32508 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32511 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32512 fractions with the given denominator.
32515 \begin_layout Enumerate
32516 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32528 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32533 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32534 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32535 Also, by inserting a
32536 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32539 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32540 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32543 \begin_layout Standard
32544 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32545 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32546 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32549 , and referring back to them through
32550 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32554 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32558 For example, try searching with the regexp
32559 \begin_inset Newline newline
32562 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32565 \begin_inset Newline newline
32568 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32571 \begin_layout Standard
32572 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32575 \begin_layout Standard
32576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32584 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32585 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32586 sub-expressions is absolute.
32588 \begin_inset space ~
32592 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32595 always refers to the first occurrence of
32596 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32599 in all entered regexps.
32607 \begin_layout Section
32609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32611 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32616 \begin_inset Index idx
32619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32628 \begin_layout Standard
32629 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32632 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32639 key or the toolbar button
32642 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32645 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32646 beginning of the currently selected text.
32647 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32648 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32649 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32650 scrolled so that it is visible.
32651 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32652 n, if any could be found.
32653 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32657 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32658 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32662 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32665 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32669 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32670 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32671 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32672 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32675 \begin_inset space ~
32683 arg "dialog-show character"
32686 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32687 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32690 \begin_layout Standard
32691 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32692 \begin_inset Newline newline
32696 \begin_inset Flex URL
32699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32701 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32707 \begin_inset Newline newline
32711 \begin_inset space ~
32714 files for each language.
32715 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32716 \begin_inset space ~
32719 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32728 \begin_inset Newline newline
32731 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32732 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32733 but in most cases these are
32749 is the language code.
32752 \begin_layout Subsection
32756 \begin_layout Standard
32759 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32760 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32762 \begin_inset space ~
32765 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32768 you can set the following things:
32771 \begin_layout Description
32773 \begin_inset space ~
32776 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32777 Depending on your platform,
32791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32792 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32793 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32808 \begin_layout Description
32810 \begin_inset space ~
32813 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32814 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32817 \begin_layout Description
32819 \begin_inset space ~
32822 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32828 \begin_inset space \space{}
32832 This should normally not be needed.
32835 \begin_layout Description
32837 \begin_inset space ~
32841 \begin_inset space ~
32844 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32856 \begin_layout Description
32858 \begin_inset space ~
32861 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32862 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32863 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32864 appear in a context menu.
32865 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32869 \begin_layout Description
32871 \begin_inset space ~
32875 \begin_inset space ~
32879 \begin_inset space ~
32882 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32886 \begin_layout Section
32888 \begin_inset Index idx
32891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32900 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32907 \begin_layout Standard
32908 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32909 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32921 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32930 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32931 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32932 which are available for many languages.
32935 \begin_layout Standard
32936 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32940 \begin_layout Subsection
32941 Setting up the thesaurus
32944 \begin_layout Standard
32953 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32957 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32962 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32968 \begin_inset space ~
32976 For instance, the US English files are named:
32979 \begin_layout Itemize
32983 \begin_layout Itemize
32987 \begin_layout Standard
32996 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32997 and you just need to point LyX (in
32999 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33000 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33001 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33003 \begin_inset space ~
33008 ) to the path where they are installed.
33012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33013 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33014 ies, typical locations are
33020 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33024 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33028 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33031 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33037 LibreOffice-<Version>
33044 On the Mac, the default location is
33046 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33047 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33048 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33049 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33050 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33051 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33059 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33060 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33061 correct place right away.
33064 \begin_layout Standard
33065 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33066 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33070 \begin_layout Itemize
33071 \begin_inset Flex URL
33074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33076 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33084 \begin_layout Standard
33085 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33086 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33088 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33089 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33090 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33092 \begin_inset space ~
33098 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33099 and point LyX there.
33102 \begin_layout Standard
33103 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33105 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33108 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33114 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33117 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33125 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33126 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33127 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33129 \begin_inset space ~
33134 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33137 \begin_layout Subsection
33138 Using the thesaurus
33141 \begin_layout Standard
33142 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33144 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33147 or the toolbar button
33150 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33153 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33155 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33157 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33158 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33159 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33168 ), related terms (such as
33171 \begin_inset space ~
33180 ), compounds (such as
33183 \begin_inset space ~
33192 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33201 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33204 \begin_layout Standard
33205 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33206 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33210 \begin_layout Standard
33211 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33212 the dictionary, such as the above
33216 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33221 \begin_inset space \space{}
33224 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33225 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33226 For example, looking up the word form
33230 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33235 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33240 \begin_inset space \space{}
33251 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33252 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33253 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33256 \begin_layout Section
33258 \begin_inset Index idx
33261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33268 \begin_inset Index idx
33271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33272 Document ! Change Tracking
33278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33280 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33287 \begin_layout Standard
33288 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33289 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33290 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33291 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33293 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33295 \begin_inset space ~
33298 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33300 \begin_inset space ~
33308 \begin_layout Standard
33309 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33323 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33324 You can change the color in
33326 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33327 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33329 \begin_inset space ~
33333 \begin_inset space ~
33338 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33344 \begin_inset Index idx
33347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33348 Color ! Change tracking
33353 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33354 the cursor is in changed text.
33355 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33358 arg "changes-merge"
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33365 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33366 \begin_inset Index idx
33369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33378 \begin_layout Standard
33379 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33385 \begin_layout Standard
33386 \begin_inset Graphics
33387 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33395 \begin_layout Standard
33396 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33402 \begin_layout Standard
33403 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33406 \begin_layout Standard
33407 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33413 \begin_layout Standard
33414 \begin_inset Tabular
33415 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33416 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33417 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33418 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33428 arg "changes-track"
33436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33442 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33444 \begin_inset space ~
33447 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33449 \begin_inset space ~
33458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33467 arg "changes-output"
33475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33481 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33483 \begin_inset space ~
33486 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33488 \begin_inset space ~
33492 \begin_inset space ~
33496 \begin_inset space ~
33505 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33526 Jumps to the next change
33532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33541 arg "change-accept"
33549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33555 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33557 \begin_inset space ~
33560 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33562 \begin_inset space ~
33571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33580 arg "change-reject"
33588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33594 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33596 \begin_inset space ~
33599 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33601 \begin_inset space ~
33610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33619 arg "changes-merge"
33627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33633 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33635 \begin_inset space ~
33638 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33640 \begin_inset space ~
33649 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33658 arg "all-changes-accept"
33666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33672 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33674 \begin_inset space ~
33677 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33679 \begin_inset space ~
33683 \begin_inset space ~
33692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33701 arg "all-changes-reject"
33709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33715 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33717 \begin_inset space ~
33720 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33722 \begin_inset space ~
33726 \begin_inset space ~
33735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33758 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33759 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33804 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33806 \begin_inset space ~
33822 \begin_layout Standard
33823 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33829 \begin_layout Standard
33830 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33850 \begin_layout Standard
33851 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33852 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33853 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33854 the next change after the current cursor position.
33855 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33856 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33857 step to the next change.
33858 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33861 \begin_layout Standard
33862 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33863 to describe a change.
33866 \begin_layout Standard
33867 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33872 \begin_inset Index idx
33875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33876 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33882 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33883 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33889 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33892 \begin_layout Section
33893 Comparison of Documents
33894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33896 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33901 \begin_inset Index idx
33904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33905 Comparison of documents
33913 \begin_layout Standard
33914 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33916 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33920 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33922 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33923 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33927 \begin_inset space ~
33931 \begin_inset space ~
33935 \begin_inset space ~
33944 \begin_inset space ~
33948 \begin_inset space ~
33952 \begin_inset space ~
33956 \begin_inset space ~
33960 \begin_inset space ~
33964 \begin_inset space ~
33969 enables the change tracking option
33972 \begin_inset space ~
33976 \begin_inset space ~
33980 \begin_inset space ~
33985 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33988 \begin_layout Section
33989 International Support
33990 \begin_inset Index idx
33993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33994 International support
34002 \begin_layout Standard
34003 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34004 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34005 up LyX to use them:
34006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34008 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34017 \begin_inset space ~
34021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34023 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34030 \begin_layout Subsection
34032 \begin_inset Index idx
34035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34042 \begin_inset Index idx
34045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 Document ! Settings
34052 \begin_inset Index idx
34055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34056 Document ! Language
34064 \begin_layout Standard
34067 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34068 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34071 dialog lets you set
34073 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34078 \begin_layout Standard
34083 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34092 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34093 For details about the different encoding options see section
34094 \begin_inset space ~
34098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34100 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34107 \begin_layout Subsection
34108 Keyboard mapping configuration
34109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34111 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34118 \begin_layout Standard
34119 If you have for example a U.
34120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34123 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34124 can use an alternate keymap.
34125 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34126 use an Italian keymap.
34129 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34130 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34131 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34134 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34135 \begin_inset space ~
34139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34141 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34146 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34147 which one you want to use.
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34152 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34153 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34157 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34158 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34159 one to support the characters you want.
34160 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34167 \begin_layout Chapter
34170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34172 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34179 \begin_layout Standard
34180 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34181 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34182 topic inside the user's guide.
34185 \begin_layout Section
34187 \begin_inset Index idx
34190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34199 \begin_layout Standard
34204 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34207 \begin_layout Subsection
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34212 Creates a new document.
34215 \begin_layout Subsection
34219 \begin_layout Standard
34220 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34221 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34222 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34225 \begin_layout Subsection
34229 \begin_layout Standard
34233 \begin_layout Subsection
34237 \begin_layout Standard
34238 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34239 Click there on a file to open it.
34242 \begin_layout Subsection
34246 \begin_layout Standard
34247 Closes the current document.
34250 \begin_layout Subsection
34254 \begin_layout Standard
34255 Closes all opened documents.
34258 \begin_layout Subsection
34262 \begin_layout Standard
34263 Saves the actual document.
34266 \begin_layout Subsection
34270 \begin_layout Standard
34271 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34274 \begin_layout Subsection
34278 \begin_layout Standard
34279 Saves all opened documents.
34282 \begin_layout Subsection
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34287 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34290 \begin_layout Subsection
34294 \begin_layout Standard
34295 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34296 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34297 It is described in the section
34299 Version Control in LyX
34303 Additional Features
34308 \begin_layout Subsection
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34313 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34314 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34316 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34320 When using the menu entry
34323 \begin_inset space ~
34328 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34332 \begin_inset space ~
34336 \begin_inset space ~
34340 \begin_inset space ~
34345 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34346 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34349 \begin_layout Subsection
34351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34360 \begin_layout Standard
34361 You can export your document to various file formats.
34362 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34363 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34364 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34367 \begin_layout Standard
34368 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34370 \begin_inset space ~
34374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34376 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34383 \begin_layout Description
34389 \begin_inset space ~
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34403 yX format of the special LyX
34404 \begin_inset space ~
34407 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34408 \begin_inset Newline newline
34411 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34414 \begin_layout Description
34415 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34421 \begin_layout Description
34423 \begin_inset space ~
34426 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34432 \begin_layout Description
34433 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34434 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34435 files paths or file names in your document.
34436 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34443 \begin_layout Description
34444 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34445 in files paths or file names
34448 \begin_layout Description
34450 \begin_inset space ~
34457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34464 eX) DVI-format using the program
34468 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34471 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34479 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34487 \begin_layout Description
34489 \begin_inset space ~
34492 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34496 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34501 \begin_layout Description
34502 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34506 \begin_layout Description
34508 \begin_inset space ~
34512 \begin_inset space ~
34515 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34519 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34527 \begin_layout Description
34534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34542 \begin_inset space ~
34553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34566 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34571 \begin_layout Description
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34586 \begin_inset space ~
34591 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34592 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34596 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34599 \begin_layout Description
34606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34619 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34620 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34628 \begin_layout Description
34635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34643 \begin_inset space ~
34654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34667 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34672 \begin_layout Description
34674 \begin_inset space ~
34678 \begin_inset space ~
34687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34696 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34697 music notation software
34702 \begin_layout Description
34709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34719 \begin_inset space ~
34723 \begin_inset space ~
34726 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34727 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34728 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34731 \begin_layout Description
34738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34748 \begin_inset space ~
34751 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34767 represent the version number)
34770 \begin_layout Description
34777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34786 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34789 \begin_layout Description
34790 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34795 \begin_layout Description
34796 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34798 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34801 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34805 \begin_layout Description
34809 \begin_inset space ~
34814 PDF-format using the program
34818 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34821 \begin_layout Description
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34841 PDF-format using the program
34845 , produces PDF-files directly
34848 \begin_layout Description
34852 \begin_inset space ~
34857 PDF-format using the program
34861 , produces PDF-files directly
34864 \begin_layout Description
34868 \begin_inset space ~
34873 PDF-format using the program
34877 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34880 \begin_layout Description
34884 \begin_inset space ~
34891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34900 PDF-format using the program
34904 , produces PDF-files directly
34907 \begin_layout Description
34911 \begin_inset space ~
34919 \begin_layout Description
34923 \begin_inset space ~
34927 \begin_inset space ~
34932 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34933 and then exported as text using the program
34938 \begin_layout Description
34943 PostScript format using the program
34948 \begin_layout Description
34949 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34950 programming language
34963 it is possible to use
34970 \begin_layout Standard
34971 If one of the menu entries
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34987 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34988 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34989 \begin_inset space ~
34993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34995 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35000 \begin_inset Index idx
35003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35004 Reconfiguration of LyX
35012 \begin_layout Subsection
35016 \begin_layout Standard
35017 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35018 format or send it to a printer.
35019 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35020 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35026 For more information have a look at section
35027 \begin_inset space ~
35031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35033 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35040 \begin_layout Subsection
35044 \begin_layout Standard
35045 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35046 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35047 prefix, see section
35048 \begin_inset space ~
35052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35054 reference "sec:Paths"
35059 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35068 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35069 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35070 \begin_inset space ~
35074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35076 reference "sub:Converters"
35083 \begin_layout Subsection
35084 New and Close Window
35087 \begin_layout Standard
35088 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35091 \begin_layout Subsection
35095 \begin_layout Standard
35096 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35099 \begin_layout Section
35101 \begin_inset Index idx
35104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35113 \begin_layout Subsection
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35118 Described in section
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35125 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35132 \begin_layout Subsection
35133 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35136 \begin_layout Standard
35137 Described in section
35138 \begin_inset space ~
35142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35144 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35151 \begin_layout Subsection
35155 \begin_layout Standard
35156 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35157 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35160 \begin_layout Subsection
35164 \begin_layout Standard
35165 Selects the whole document.
35168 \begin_layout Subsection
35169 Find & Replace (Quick)
35172 \begin_layout Standard
35173 Described in section
35174 \begin_inset space ~
35178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35180 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35187 \begin_layout Subsection
35188 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35191 \begin_layout Standard
35192 Described in section
35193 \begin_inset space ~
35197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35199 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35206 \begin_layout Subsection
35207 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35210 \begin_layout Standard
35211 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35215 \begin_layout Subsection
35219 \begin_layout Standard
35220 Described in section
35221 \begin_inset space ~
35225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35227 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35234 \begin_layout Subsection
35236 \begin_inset Index idx
35239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35240 Paragraph ! Settings
35248 \begin_layout Standard
35249 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35250 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35254 \begin_layout Standard
35255 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35256 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35262 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35263 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35273 \begin_layout Subsection
35277 \begin_layout Standard
35278 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35279 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35280 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35284 \begin_layout Standard
35285 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35287 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35288 The properties of tables are described in section
35289 \begin_inset space ~
35293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35295 reference "sec:Tables"
35299 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35300 \begin_inset space ~
35304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35306 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35313 \begin_layout Subsection
35314 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35317 \begin_layout Standard
35318 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35320 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35321 \begin_inset space ~
35325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35327 reference "sec:Nesting"
35332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35334 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35341 \begin_layout Subsection
35344 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35347 \begin_layout Standard
35348 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35349 nts of the same type.
35351 \begin_inset space ~
35355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35357 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35361 for an explanation.
35364 \begin_layout Section
35366 \begin_inset Index idx
35369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 At the bottom of the
35383 menu the opened documents are listed.
35386 \begin_layout Subsection
35387 Open/Close all Insets
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35391 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35394 \begin_layout Subsection
35395 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35398 \begin_layout Standard
35399 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35402 \begin_layout Standard
35403 Math macros are described in the
35410 \begin_layout Subsection
35414 \begin_layout Standard
35415 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35416 \begin_inset space ~
35420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35422 reference "sec:Navigating"
35427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35429 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35436 \begin_layout Subsection
35440 \begin_layout Standard
35441 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35443 \begin_inset space ~
35447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35449 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35456 \begin_layout Subsection
35460 \begin_layout Standard
35461 Opens a window showing console messages.
35462 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35466 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35467 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35470 \begin_layout Subsection
35472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35474 name "sub:Toolbars"
35479 \begin_inset Index idx
35482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35491 \begin_layout Standard
35492 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35493 All toolbars and the
35496 \begin_inset space ~
35501 can be turned on and off.
35506 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35518 \begin_inset space ~
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35535 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35539 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35546 \begin_layout Standard
35551 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35555 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35556 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35557 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35558 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35559 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35562 \begin_layout Standard
35563 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35564 \begin_inset space ~
35568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35570 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35577 \begin_layout Subsection
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35593 \begin_inset space ~
35597 \begin_inset space ~
35601 \begin_inset space ~
35605 \begin_inset space ~
35610 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35613 \begin_inset space ~
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35629 \begin_inset space ~
35633 \begin_inset space ~
35638 will split it horizontally.
35639 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35640 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35641 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35642 three or more documents at the same time.
35643 To close a split view, use the menu
35646 \begin_inset space ~
35650 \begin_inset space ~
35658 \begin_layout Subsection
35662 \begin_layout Standard
35663 Closes a split view.
35666 \begin_layout Subsection
35670 \begin_layout Standard
35671 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35672 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35673 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35674 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35675 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35678 \begin_layout Section
35680 \begin_inset Index idx
35683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35692 \begin_layout Subsection
35696 \begin_layout Standard
35697 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35698 \begin_inset space ~
35702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35704 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35715 \begin_layout Subsection
35717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35719 name "sub:Special-Character"
35726 \begin_layout Standard
35727 Here you can insert the following characters:
35730 \begin_layout Description
35735 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35737 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35738 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35739 You can get a complete display by checking
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35748 \begin_inset Newline newline
35752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35760 Not all characters will be visible in the
35764 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35772 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35776 ) can display every character.
35784 \begin_layout Description
35785 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35789 \begin_layout Description
35791 \begin_inset space ~
35795 \begin_inset space ~
35798 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35799 \begin_inset space ~
35803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35805 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35812 \begin_layout Description
35814 \begin_inset space ~
35817 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35820 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35821 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35827 \begin_layout Description
35829 \begin_inset space ~
35832 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35835 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35836 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35842 \begin_layout Description
35844 \begin_inset space ~
35847 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35851 \begin_layout Description
35853 \begin_inset space ~
35856 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35860 \begin_layout Description
35862 \begin_inset space ~
35865 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35871 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35877 \begin_layout Description
35879 \begin_inset space ~
35882 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35886 \begin_layout Description
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35892 \begin_inset Index idx
35895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35902 \begin_inset Index idx
35905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35906 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35911 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35912 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35914 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35919 \begin_inset Index idx
35922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35923 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35929 \begin_inset Newline newline
35932 More information about this feature can be found in the
35938 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35944 \begin_layout Subsection
35948 \begin_layout Standard
35949 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35952 \begin_layout Description
35953 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35954 \begin_inset script superscript
35956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35965 \begin_layout Description
35966 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35967 \begin_inset script subscript
35969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35978 \begin_layout Description
35980 \begin_inset space ~
35983 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35984 \begin_inset space ~
35988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35990 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35997 \begin_layout Description
35999 \begin_inset space ~
36002 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36003 \begin_inset space ~
36007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36009 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36016 \begin_layout Description
36018 \begin_inset space ~
36021 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36022 \begin_inset space ~
36026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36028 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36035 \begin_layout Description
36037 \begin_inset space ~
36040 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36046 \begin_inset space \space{}
36049 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36050 An example from the LyX
36055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36058 To insert a fraction use the command
36063 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36067 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36076 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36083 \begin_layout Description
36085 \begin_inset space ~
36088 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36089 \begin_inset space ~
36093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36095 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36102 \begin_layout Description
36104 \begin_inset space ~
36107 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36108 \begin_inset space ~
36112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36114 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36121 \begin_layout Description
36123 \begin_inset space ~
36126 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36127 \begin_inset space ~
36131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36133 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36140 \begin_layout Description
36141 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36142 \begin_inset space ~
36146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36148 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36155 \begin_layout Description
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36160 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36167 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36174 \begin_layout Description
36176 \begin_inset space ~
36179 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36180 \begin_inset space ~
36184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36186 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36193 \begin_layout Description
36195 \begin_inset space ~
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36202 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36209 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36216 \begin_layout Description
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36221 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36222 as described in section
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36229 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36236 \begin_layout Description
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36241 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36248 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36255 \begin_layout Description
36257 \begin_inset space ~
36260 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36261 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36269 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36276 \begin_layout Description
36278 \begin_inset space ~
36281 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36282 \begin_inset space ~
36286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36288 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36295 \begin_layout Description
36297 \begin_inset space ~
36301 \begin_inset space ~
36304 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36305 \begin_inset space ~
36309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36311 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36318 \begin_layout Subsection
36322 \begin_layout Standard
36323 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36327 \begin_inset space ~
36348 are described in section
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36355 reference "sec:toc"
36364 is described in section
36365 \begin_inset space ~
36369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36371 reference "sec:Index"
36379 is described in section
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36386 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36392 BibTeX Bibliography
36394 is described in section
36395 \begin_inset space ~
36399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36401 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36408 \begin_layout Subsection
36412 \begin_layout Standard
36413 To insert floats, as described in section
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36420 reference "sec:Floats"
36424 and in detail the chapter
36431 \begin_inset space ~
36439 \begin_layout Subsection
36443 \begin_layout Standard
36444 To insert notes, described in section
36445 \begin_inset space ~
36449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36451 reference "sec:Notes"
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36465 Branches are described in section
36466 \begin_inset space ~
36470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36472 reference "sec:Branches"
36479 \begin_layout Subsection
36483 \begin_layout Standard
36484 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36485 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36487 An example is the document class
36488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36495 with three custom insets.
36498 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36502 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36508 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36511 \begin_layout Subsection
36513 \begin_inset Index idx
36516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36525 \begin_layout Standard
36526 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36528 For more information see chapter
36530 External Document Parts
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36539 \begin_layout Subsection
36541 \begin_inset Index idx
36544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36553 \begin_layout Standard
36554 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36555 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36562 \begin_inset space ~
36570 \begin_layout Subsection
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36579 dialog as described in section
36580 \begin_inset space ~
36584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36586 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36593 \begin_layout Subsection
36597 \begin_layout Standard
36602 as described in section
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36609 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36616 \begin_layout Subsection
36620 \begin_layout Standard
36625 as described in section
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36632 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36639 \begin_layout Subsection
36641 \begin_inset Index idx
36644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36651 \begin_inset Index idx
36654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36655 Longtables ! Caption
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36665 Floats are described in section
36666 \begin_inset space ~
36670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36672 reference "sec:Floats"
36676 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36691 \begin_layout Subsection
36695 \begin_layout Standard
36696 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36697 \begin_inset space ~
36701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36703 reference "sec:Index"
36710 \begin_layout Subsection
36714 \begin_layout Standard
36715 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36716 \begin_inset space ~
36720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36722 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36729 \begin_layout Subsection
36733 \begin_layout Standard
36734 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36735 Tables are described in section
36736 \begin_inset space ~
36740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36742 reference "sec:Tables"
36746 and in detail in the chapter
36753 \begin_inset space ~
36761 \begin_layout Subsection
36765 \begin_layout Standard
36771 Graphics are described in section
36772 \begin_inset space ~
36776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36778 reference "sec:Graphics"
36785 \begin_layout Subsection
36789 \begin_layout Standard
36790 Inserts a URL as described in section
36791 \begin_inset space ~
36795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36797 reference "sub:URLs"
36804 \begin_layout Subsection
36808 \begin_layout Standard
36809 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36816 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36823 \begin_layout Subsection
36827 \begin_layout Standard
36828 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36829 \begin_inset space ~
36833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36835 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36842 \begin_layout Subsection
36846 \begin_layout Standard
36847 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36854 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36861 \begin_layout Subsection
36865 \begin_layout Standard
36866 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36867 title or caption of a float.
36868 Inserts a short title as described in section
36869 \begin_inset space ~
36873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36875 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36882 \begin_layout Subsection
36886 \begin_layout Standard
36887 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36888 \begin_inset space ~
36892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36894 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36901 \begin_layout Subsection
36903 \begin_inset Index idx
36906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36915 \begin_layout Standard
36916 Inserts a program listings box.
36917 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36919 Program Code Listings
36924 \begin_inset space ~
36932 \begin_layout Subsection
36936 \begin_layout Standard
36937 Inserts the actual date.
36938 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36940 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36948 \begin_inset space ~
36956 \begin_layout Subsection
36960 \begin_layout Standard
36961 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36962 \begin_inset space ~
36966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36968 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36975 \begin_layout Section
36977 \begin_inset Index idx
36980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36989 \begin_layout Standard
36990 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36991 \begin_inset space ~
36994 of the current document.
36995 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36998 \begin_layout Subsection
37002 \begin_layout Standard
37003 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37004 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37005 to jump, for example, between section
37006 \begin_inset space ~
37010 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37011 \begin_inset space ~
37014 2.5 and use the submenu
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37021 \begin_inset space ~
37028 \begin_inset space ~
37034 \begin_inset space ~
37038 \begin_inset space ~
37044 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37048 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37054 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37057 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37060 \begin_layout Standard
37061 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37070 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37073 \begin_inset space ~
37078 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37081 \begin_layout Subsection
37082 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37085 \begin_layout Standard
37086 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37090 \begin_layout Subsection
37094 \begin_layout Standard
37095 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37096 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37097 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37105 \begin_inset space ~
37113 \begin_layout Subsection
37117 \begin_layout Standard
37118 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37121 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37136 manual for a detailed description.
37139 \begin_layout Section
37141 \begin_inset Index idx
37144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37153 \begin_layout Subsection
37157 \begin_layout Standard
37158 Change Tracking is described in section
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37165 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37172 \begin_layout Subsection
37177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37187 \begin_layout Standard
37188 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37190 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37191 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37192 to the clipboard or update the view.
37193 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37196 \begin_layout Subsection
37197 Start Appendix Here
37200 \begin_layout Standard
37201 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37202 as described in section
37203 \begin_inset space ~
37207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37209 reference "sec:Appendices"
37216 \begin_layout Subsection
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37224 \begin_layout Standard
37225 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37226 default output format for the document (menu
37228 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37229 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37230 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37232 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37242 \begin_inset space ~
37246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37248 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37252 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37254 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37255 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37260 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37265 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37283 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37287 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37288 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37290 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37291 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37293 \begin_inset space ~
37296 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37301 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37311 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37316 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37317 The default output format is
37320 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \begin_layout Subsection
37329 View (Other Formats)
37332 \begin_layout Standard
37333 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37334 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37335 actual document with an external program.
37336 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37337 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37338 All possible formats are listed in section
37339 \begin_inset space ~
37343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37345 reference "sub:Export"
37350 You should at least see the menu entry
37355 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37356 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37363 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37368 \begin_inset Index idx
37371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37372 Reconfiguration of LyX
37380 \begin_layout Standard
37381 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37382 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37384 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37385 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37387 \begin_inset space ~
37390 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37395 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37405 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37410 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37413 \begin_layout Subsection
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37421 \begin_layout Standard
37422 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37423 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37426 \begin_layout Subsection
37427 Update (Other Formats)
37430 \begin_layout Standard
37431 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37432 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37435 \begin_layout Subsection
37436 View Master Document
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37440 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37461 manual for more information on this topic).
37462 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37463 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37476 generates the output of the whole book, while
37480 will just output the chapter alone.
37483 \begin_layout Standard
37484 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37485 in the document settings (menu
37487 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37488 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37489 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37501 \begin_inset space ~
37505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37507 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37511 ) or in the preferences (menu
37513 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37514 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37519 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37521 \begin_inset space ~
37524 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37536 \begin_inset space ~
37540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37542 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37549 \begin_layout Subsection
37550 Update Master Document
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37575 manual for more information on this topic).
37576 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37577 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37580 \begin_layout Standard
37581 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37582 in the document settings (menu
37584 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37585 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37586 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37604 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37608 ) or in the preferences (menu
37610 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37611 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37616 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37621 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37639 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37646 \begin_layout Subsection
37650 \begin_layout Standard
37651 Un/compresses the current document.
37654 \begin_layout Subsection
37658 \begin_layout Standard
37659 The document settings are described in appendix
37660 \begin_inset space ~
37664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37666 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37673 \begin_layout Section
37675 \begin_inset Index idx
37678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37687 \begin_layout Subsection
37691 \begin_layout Standard
37692 Spell checking is explained in section
37693 \begin_inset space ~
37697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37699 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37706 \begin_layout Subsection
37710 \begin_layout Standard
37711 The thesaurus is described in section
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37718 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37725 \begin_layout Subsection
37727 \begin_inset Index idx
37730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37737 \begin_inset Index idx
37740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37749 \begin_layout Standard
37750 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37751 the highlighted document part.
37754 \begin_layout Subsection
37759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37767 \begin_inset Index idx
37770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37779 \begin_layout Standard
37780 Generates with the help of the program
37784 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37785 This feature is not available on Windows.
37788 \begin_layout Subsection
37793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37801 \begin_inset Index idx
37804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37813 \begin_layout Standard
37814 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37819 \begin_inset space ~
37824 to see the full filename paths.
37827 \begin_layout Subsection
37829 \begin_inset Index idx
37832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37841 \begin_layout Standard
37842 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37843 \begin_inset space ~
37847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37849 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37856 \begin_layout Subsection
37858 \begin_inset Index idx
37861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37862 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37873 Reconfiguration of LyX
37877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37890 \begin_inset Index idx
37893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37894 Reconfiguration of LyX
37902 \begin_layout Standard
37903 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37904 needs; see also section
37905 \begin_inset space ~
37909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37911 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37918 \begin_layout Subsection
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37927 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37928 \begin_inset space ~
37932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37934 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37941 \begin_layout Section
37943 \begin_inset Index idx
37946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37955 \begin_layout Standard
37956 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37958 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37962 \begin_layout Standard
37966 \begin_inset space ~
37971 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37972 found by LyX (see also section
37973 \begin_inset space ~
37977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37979 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37986 \begin_layout Standard
37990 \begin_inset space ~
37997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38006 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38010 \begin_layout Section
38012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38014 name "sec:Toolbars"
38021 \begin_layout Standard
38022 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38023 \begin_inset space ~
38027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38029 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38036 \begin_layout Standard
38037 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38038 This is described in the
38040 Additional Features
38045 \begin_layout Subsection
38047 \begin_inset Index idx
38050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38059 \begin_layout Standard
38060 \begin_inset Graphics
38061 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38069 \begin_layout Standard
38070 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38076 \begin_layout Standard
38077 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38094 \begin_inset Note Note
38097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38098 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38103 manual for more information.
38111 \begin_layout Standard
38112 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38118 \begin_layout Standard
38119 \begin_inset Tabular
38120 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38121 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38129 \begin_inset Graphics
38130 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 pull-down box for the environments
38157 \begin_layout Standard
38158 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38164 \begin_layout Standard
38166 \begin_inset Tabular
38167 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38168 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38169 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38170 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38194 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38224 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38231 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38254 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38261 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38270 arg "dialog-show print"
38278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38284 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38300 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38314 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38344 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38374 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38404 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38434 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38464 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38494 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38534 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38562 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38576 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38577 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38605 Emphasize text, function of the
38607 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38609 \begin_inset space ~
38612 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38621 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38642 Set text to noun style, function of the
38644 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38646 \begin_inset space ~
38649 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38667 arg "textstyle-apply"
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38679 Format text using the current settings in the
38681 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38683 \begin_inset space ~
38686 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38719 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38721 \begin_inset space ~
38730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38739 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38753 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38767 arg "tabular-insert"
38775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38781 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38797 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38809 Toggle outline window on/off,
38811 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38854 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38866 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38879 \begin_layout Subsection
38881 \begin_inset Index idx
38884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38893 \begin_layout Standard
38894 \begin_inset Graphics
38895 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38903 \begin_layout Standard
38904 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38910 \begin_layout Standard
38911 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38915 \begin_layout Standard
38916 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38922 \begin_layout Standard
38923 \begin_inset Tabular
38924 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38925 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38926 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38927 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38964 arg "layout Enumerate"
38972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38991 arg "layout Itemize"
38999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39045 arg "layout Description"
39053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39072 arg "depth-increment"
39080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39088 \begin_inset space ~
39092 \begin_inset space ~
39101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39110 arg "depth-decrement"
39118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39124 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39126 \begin_inset space ~
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39148 arg "float-insert figure"
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39162 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39163 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39179 arg "float-insert table"
39187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39193 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39194 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39224 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39231 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39240 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39254 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39261 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39270 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39284 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39314 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39334 arg "nomencl-insert"
39342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39348 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39350 \begin_inset space ~
39359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39368 arg "footnote-insert"
39376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39382 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39398 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39412 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39414 \begin_inset space ~
39423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39446 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39447 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39460 \begin_inset space ~
39469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39478 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39492 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39522 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39529 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39552 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39569 \begin_inset space ~
39578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39587 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39601 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39602 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39618 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39632 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39633 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39635 \begin_inset space ~
39644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39653 arg "dialog-show character"
39661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39667 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39672 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39688 arg "layout-paragraph"
39696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39702 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39704 \begin_inset space ~
39713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39722 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39736 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39750 \begin_layout Subsection
39751 View/Update Toolbar
39752 \begin_inset Index idx
39755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39756 Toolbar ! View / Update
39764 \begin_layout Standard
39765 \begin_inset Graphics
39766 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39773 \begin_layout Standard
39774 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39780 \begin_layout Standard
39781 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39785 \begin_layout Standard
39786 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39792 \begin_layout Standard
39793 \begin_inset Tabular
39794 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39795 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39796 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39797 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39821 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39837 arg "buffer-update"
39845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39851 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39867 arg "master-buffer-view"
39875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39881 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39883 \begin_inset space ~
39892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39901 arg "master-buffer-update"
39909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39915 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39939 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39953 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39954 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39955 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39956 Synchronize with Output
39962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39967 \begin_inset Graphics
39968 filename ../images/view-others.png
39970 groupId toolbarbuttons
39981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39987 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39988 View (Other Formats)
39994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39999 \begin_inset Graphics
40000 filename ../images/update-others.png
40002 groupId toolbarbuttons
40011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40017 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40018 Update (Other Formats)
40031 \begin_layout Standard
40032 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40036 \begin_layout Subsection
40040 \begin_layout Standard
40041 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40042 \begin_inset space ~
40046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40048 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40052 , the table toolbar
40053 \begin_inset Index idx
40056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40070 manual and the math macro toolbar
40071 \begin_inset Index idx
40074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40087 \begin_layout Chapter
40088 The Document Settings
40089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40091 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40096 \begin_inset Index idx
40099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40100 Document ! Settings
40108 \begin_layout Standard
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40117 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40118 is called with the menu
40120 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40124 You can save your document settings as default with the
40126 Save as Document Defaults
40128 button in any dialog.
40129 This will create a template named
40133 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40137 \begin_layout Standard
40142 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40143 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40146 \begin_layout Standard
40147 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40148 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40149 to find the one you are looking for.
40150 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40151 the submenus of the dialog.
40153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40157 \begin_inset space \space{}
40161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40168 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40169 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40170 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40173 \begin_layout Section
40177 \begin_layout Standard
40178 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40180 Document classes are described in section
40181 \begin_inset space ~
40185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40187 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40195 \begin_layout Standard
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40204 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40208 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40209 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40211 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40221 Some classes use special class options by default.
40222 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40226 and you can decide to use them or not.
40227 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40228 recommended you leave them untouched.
40233 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40238 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40239 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40245 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40246 \begin_inset Newline newline
40251 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40254 \begin_inset Newline newline
40257 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40263 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40265 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40277 \begin_layout Standard
40282 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40283 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40284 document is opened without its master.
40285 This way child documents are always compilable.
40286 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40301 \begin_layout Standard
40302 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40312 \begin_inset Index idx
40315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40316 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40322 \begin_inset Index idx
40325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40326 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40331 for cross-references, see section
40332 \begin_inset space ~
40336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40338 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40345 \begin_layout Section
40349 \begin_layout Standard
40350 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40351 Please refer to the section
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40362 \begin_inset space ~
40367 manual for details.
40370 \begin_layout Section
40374 \begin_layout Standard
40375 Modules are explained in section
40376 \begin_inset space ~
40380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40382 reference "sub:Modules"
40389 \begin_layout Section
40393 \begin_layout Standard
40395 \begin_inset space ~
40399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40401 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40408 \begin_layout Section
40412 \begin_layout Standard
40413 The document font settings are described in section
40414 \begin_inset space ~
40418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40420 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40427 \begin_layout Section
40431 \begin_layout Standard
40432 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40444 \begin_inset space ~
40449 and whether it should be a
40452 \begin_inset space ~
40457 can also be specified here.
40460 \begin_layout Standard
40461 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40463 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40465 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40468 \begin_layout Section
40472 \begin_layout Standard
40473 This dialog is described in sections
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40480 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40487 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40494 \begin_layout Section
40498 \begin_layout Standard
40499 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40506 reference "sub:Margins"
40513 \begin_layout Section
40515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40517 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40522 \begin_inset Index idx
40525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40526 Language ! Encoding
40534 \begin_layout Standard
40535 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40536 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40537 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40538 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40539 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40540 known for a particular character).
40544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40545 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40550 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40555 manual for details.
40563 \begin_layout Standard
40564 If you use the option
40568 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40569 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40570 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40571 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40572 exactly one encoding.
40573 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40576 \begin_layout Standard
40577 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40578 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40579 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40580 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40581 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40582 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40587 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40588 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40589 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40590 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40591 engines to standard LaTeX.
40592 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40593 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40596 \begin_inset space ~
40603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40634 \begin_inset space ~
40640 \begin_inset space ~
40644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40646 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40651 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40655 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40658 \begin_layout Standard
40662 \begin_inset space ~
40667 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40677 The possible settings are:
40680 \begin_layout Description
40681 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40683 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40684 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40688 \begin_inset space ~
40692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40694 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40701 \begin_layout Description
40702 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40703 format you will use.
40704 In many cases this will be
40709 \begin_inset Index idx
40712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40713 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40719 If the newer package
40724 \begin_inset Index idx
40727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40728 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40733 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40734 this package will be used instead of
40741 \begin_layout Description
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40754 would be more appropriate.
40757 \begin_layout Description
40758 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40759 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40763 (for German texts), type in
40766 \begin_inset Newline newline
40771 usepackage{ngerman}
40774 \begin_layout Description
40775 None will not use a language package.
40776 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40779 \begin_layout Standard
40780 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40783 \begin_layout Description
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40789 \begin_inset space ~
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40800 , but the LaTeX-package
40805 \begin_inset Index idx
40808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40809 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40815 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40816 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40817 languages in TeX code.
40820 \begin_layout Description
40821 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40822 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40823 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40826 \begin_layout Description
40828 \begin_inset space ~
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40835 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40838 \begin_layout Description
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40844 \begin_inset space ~
40847 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40850 \begin_layout Description
40852 \begin_inset space ~
40855 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40858 \begin_layout Description
40860 \begin_inset space ~
40864 \begin_inset space ~
40867 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40868 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40871 \begin_layout Description
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40880 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40884 \begin_layout Description
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40893 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40894 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40897 \begin_layout Description
40899 \begin_inset space ~
40903 \begin_inset space ~
40907 \begin_inset space ~
40910 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40917 \begin_layout Description
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40930 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40931 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40934 \begin_layout Description
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40943 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40944 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40945 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40956 \begin_layout Description
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40965 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40966 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40967 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40968 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40973 \begin_inset space ~
40979 \begin_layout Description
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40988 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40991 \begin_layout Description
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40997 \begin_inset space ~
41000 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41003 \begin_layout Description
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41012 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41015 \begin_layout Description
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41020 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41023 \begin_layout Description
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41028 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41031 \begin_layout Description
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41040 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41043 \begin_layout Description
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41055 \begin_layout Description
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41064 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41067 \begin_layout Description
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_layout Description
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_inset space ~
41088 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41093 \begin_inset Index idx
41096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41097 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41102 , when using this, set the document language to
41107 \begin_layout Description
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41113 \begin_inset space ~
41116 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41120 , when using this, set the document language to
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41129 \begin_layout Description
41131 \begin_inset space ~
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41138 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41143 \begin_inset Index idx
41146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41147 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41152 , when using this, set the document language to
41157 \begin_layout Description
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41166 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41170 , when using this, set the document language to
41175 \begin_layout Description
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41184 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41188 , when using this, set the document language to
41193 \begin_layout Description
41195 \begin_inset space ~
41198 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41201 \begin_layout Description
41203 \begin_inset space ~
41207 \begin_inset space ~
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41214 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41217 \begin_layout Description
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41230 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41231 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41232 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41247 \begin_layout Description
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41256 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41257 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41260 \begin_layout Description
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41269 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41274 \begin_inset Index idx
41277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41278 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41283 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41286 \begin_layout Description
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41295 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41303 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41308 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41310 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41313 \begin_layout Description
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41322 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41327 \begin_inset Index idx
41330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41331 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41336 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41339 \begin_layout Description
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41344 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41349 \begin_inset Index idx
41352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41353 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41359 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41363 \begin_layout Description
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41376 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_layout Description
41385 \begin_inset space ~
41389 \begin_inset space ~
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41396 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41397 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41398 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41402 \begin_layout Description
41404 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41412 \begin_inset space ~
41415 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41416 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41419 \begin_layout Section
41421 \begin_inset Index idx
41424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41431 \begin_inset Index idx
41434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41441 \begin_inset Index idx
41444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 Color ! Shaded boxes
41451 \begin_inset Index idx
41454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41455 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41463 \begin_layout Standard
41464 Here you can alter the font color for the
41468 (default: black), for
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41476 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41480 (default: white) and for
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41493 sets the color back to the default.
41496 \begin_layout Standard
41497 Clicking any button showing
41505 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41506 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41507 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41508 later more quickly.
41511 \begin_layout Standard
41512 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41516 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41521 out note appears blue in the output.)
41529 \begin_layout Standard
41530 Note, if you change the
41533 \begin_inset space ~
41538 font color and use the option
41541 \begin_inset space ~
41546 in the document settings under
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41554 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41555 \begin_inset space ~
41559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41561 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41568 \begin_layout Standard
41569 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41575 \begin_layout Standard
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41588 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41590 \begin_inset space ~
41593 Code after a forced page break:
41596 \begin_layout Itemize
41597 For the page color:
41598 \begin_inset Newline newline
41605 pagecolor{color name}
41608 \begin_layout Itemize
41609 For the text color:
41610 \begin_inset Newline newline
41620 \begin_layout Standard
41621 You are restricted to one of
41657 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41664 \begin_inset space ~
41670 \begin_inset Newline newline
41673 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41674 names to refer to them:
41677 \begin_layout Itemize
41683 \begin_inset Newline newline
41688 page_backgroundcolor
41691 \begin_layout Itemize
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41701 \begin_inset Newline newline
41709 \begin_layout Itemize
41713 \begin_inset space ~
41719 \begin_inset Newline newline
41727 \begin_layout Itemize
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41737 \begin_inset Newline newline
41745 \begin_layout Standard
41746 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41747 \begin_inset space ~
41750 Cells of the Embedded
41751 \begin_inset space ~
41757 \begin_layout Section
41761 \begin_layout Standard
41762 Here you can adjust the
41766 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41770 as described in section
41771 \begin_inset space ~
41775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41777 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41784 \begin_layout Section
41788 \begin_layout Standard
41789 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41794 \begin_inset Index idx
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41798 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41808 \begin_inset Index idx
41811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41812 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41820 Sectioned bibliography
41822 using the LaTeX package
41827 \begin_inset Index idx
41830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41831 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41836 and you can select a
41840 for the generation of the bibliography.
41841 For a further description see section
41842 \begin_inset space ~
41846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41848 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41855 \begin_layout Section
41859 \begin_layout Standard
41860 Here you can define the
41864 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41872 reference "sec:Index"
41879 \begin_layout Section
41883 \begin_layout Standard
41884 The PDF properties are explained in section
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41891 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41898 \begin_layout Section
41902 \begin_layout Standard
41903 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41908 \begin_inset Index idx
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41912 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41922 \begin_inset Index idx
41925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41926 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41936 \begin_inset Index idx
41939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41940 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41950 \begin_inset Index idx
41953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41954 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41959 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41962 \begin_layout Description
41963 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41964 ensure that you have enabled
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41975 \begin_layout Description
41976 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41991 \begin_layout Description
41992 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42003 \begin_layout Description
42004 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42006 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42015 \begin_layout Section
42019 \begin_layout Standard
42020 The float placement options are described in the section
42023 \begin_inset space ~
42031 \begin_inset space ~
42039 \begin_layout Section
42043 \begin_layout Standard
42044 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42046 Program Code Listings
42051 \begin_inset space ~
42059 \begin_layout Section
42063 \begin_layout Standard
42064 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42072 set to be used and set the
42077 The itemize environment is described in section
42078 \begin_inset space ~
42082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42084 reference "sec:Itemize"
42091 \begin_layout Standard
42092 You can furthermore specify a
42095 \begin_inset space ~
42100 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42101 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42108 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42114 \begin_inset space \space{}
42118 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42128 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42129 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42132 \begin_layout Standard
42133 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42141 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42144 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42145 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42147 \begin_inset space ~
42153 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42157 usepackage{textcomp}
42160 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42164 usepackage{amssymb}
42174 \begin_layout Section
42178 \begin_layout Standard
42179 Branches are described in section
42180 \begin_inset space ~
42184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42186 reference "sec:Branches"
42193 \begin_layout Section
42195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42197 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42204 \begin_layout Standard
42205 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42208 \begin_layout Description
42210 \begin_inset space ~
42214 \begin_inset space ~
42217 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42237 View Master Document
42238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42245 Update Master Document
42246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42253 menu or the toolbar.
42254 The default is set in
42256 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42257 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42259 \begin_inset space ~
42262 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42266 \begin_inset space ~
42270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42272 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42279 \begin_layout Description
42281 \begin_inset space ~
42285 \begin_inset space ~
42288 Output settings for the menu
42290 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42292 \begin_inset space ~
42298 For a detailed description see section
42300 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42313 \begin_layout Description
42315 \begin_inset space ~
42319 \begin_inset space ~
42322 Options offers settings for the export format
42328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42341 \begin_inset space ~
42346 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42350 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42354 \begin_inset space ~
42359 settings are described in detail in section
42361 Math Output in XHTML
42366 \begin_inset space ~
42375 \begin_inset space ~
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42384 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42387 \begin_layout Section
42392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42402 \begin_layout Standard
42403 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42404 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42405 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42406 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42410 \begin_layout Standard
42411 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42418 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42425 \begin_layout Chapter
42431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42433 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42438 \begin_inset Index idx
42441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42450 \begin_layout Standard
42451 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42453 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42457 It has the following submenus.
42460 \begin_layout Section
42464 \begin_layout Subsection
42468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42469 User Interface File
42470 \begin_inset Index idx
42473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42474 Customization ! of toolbars
42480 \begin_inset Index idx
42483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42484 Customization ! of menus
42492 \begin_layout Standard
42493 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42494 interface (ui) file.
42495 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42503 \begin_layout Description
42508 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42511 \begin_layout Description
42518 the menu entries in popup context menus
42521 \begin_layout Description
42526 specifies the toolbar buttons
42529 \begin_layout Standard
42530 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42531 and edit the entries.
42534 \begin_layout Standard
42535 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42547 entries must be finished with an explicit
42572 and in the case of the
42573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42585 The syntax for the entries is:
42588 \begin_layout Standard
42589 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42617 \begin_layout Standard
42619 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42622 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42624 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42637 \begin_inset space ~
42645 \begin_layout Standard
42646 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42653 For example, assuming you use the menu
42655 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42658 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42662 \begin_layout Standard
42663 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42687 \begin_layout Standard
42689 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42704 to have the sixth bookmark.
42707 \begin_layout Standard
42711 \begin_inset space ~
42716 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42717 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42718 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42721 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42735 Enable tool tips in main work area
42737 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42741 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42745 \begin_layout Standard
42748 Restore window layouts and geometries
42750 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42751 in the last LyX session.
42754 \begin_layout Standard
42757 Restore cursor positions
42759 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42763 \begin_layout Standard
42766 Load opened files from last session
42768 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42771 \begin_layout Standard
42774 Clear all session information
42776 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42777 of last opened documents, etc.).
42780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42784 name "sub:Backup documents"
42789 \begin_inset Index idx
42792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42801 \begin_layout Standard
42804 Backup original documents when saving
42806 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42807 it was saved the last time.
42808 It is stored in the
42811 \begin_inset space ~
42817 \begin_inset space ~
42821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42823 reference "sec:Paths"
42827 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42830 \begin_inset space ~
42836 The backup file has the file extension
42837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42851 \begin_layout Standard
42854 Backup documents, every
42856 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42859 \begin_layout Standard
42862 Save documents compressed by default
42864 always saves files in a compressed format.
42867 \begin_layout Standard
42872 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42875 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42877 \begin_inset space ~
42885 \begin_layout Standard
42888 Open documents in tabs
42890 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42893 \begin_layout Standard
42898 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42910 reference "sec:Paths"
42914 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42920 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42922 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42925 \begin_layout Standard
42928 Single close-tab button
42930 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42933 \begin_inset Graphics
42934 filename ../images/closetab.png
42941 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42942 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42946 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42954 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42962 \begin_layout Subsection
42964 \begin_inset Index idx
42967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42976 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42984 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42987 \begin_layout Standard
42988 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42996 This section only deals with the fonts
43001 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43004 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43005 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43016 \begin_layout Standard
43017 By default, LyX uses
43033 (depends on the system) as its
43036 \begin_inset space ~
43052 \begin_layout Standard
43053 You can change the font size with the
43060 \begin_layout Standard
43065 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43070 points have the size of 1
43071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43075 \begin_inset space ~
43079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43081 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43086 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43091 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43092 \begin_inset space ~
43096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43098 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43105 \begin_layout Standard
43108 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43110 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43111 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43112 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43113 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43115 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43116 \begin_inset space ~
43122 \begin_layout Subsection
43124 \begin_inset Index idx
43127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43134 \begin_inset Index idx
43137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43146 \begin_layout Standard
43147 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43148 the list and selecting the
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43156 By checking the option
43160 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43163 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43164 \begin_inset space ~
43168 \begin_inset space ~
43173 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43176 \begin_layout Subsection
43178 \begin_inset Index idx
43181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43190 \begin_layout Standard
43191 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43194 \begin_layout Standard
43199 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43200 This feature is described in section
43201 \begin_inset space ~
43205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43207 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43214 \begin_layout Standard
43215 Checking the option
43218 \begin_inset space ~
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43226 \begin_inset space ~
43231 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43234 \begin_layout Section
43236 \begin_inset Index idx
43239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43248 \begin_layout Subsection
43252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43256 \begin_layout Standard
43259 Cursor follows scrollbar
43261 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43265 \begin_layout Standard
43266 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43267 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43268 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43271 \begin_layout Standard
43274 Scroll below end of document
43276 is self-explanatory.
43279 \begin_layout Standard
43280 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43287 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43289 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43290 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43293 \begin_layout Standard
43296 Sort environments alphabetically
43298 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43304 Group environments by their category
43306 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43309 \begin_layout Standard
43314 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43329 \begin_layout Standard
43330 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43335 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43336 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43340 \begin_layout Subsection
43342 \begin_inset Index idx
43345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43352 \begin_inset Index idx
43355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43356 Settings ! Shortcuts
43364 \begin_layout Standard
43369 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43370 Several binding files are available, among them:
43373 \begin_layout Description
43374 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43377 \begin_layout Description
43378 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43390 \begin_layout Description
43391 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43402 \begin_layout Standard
43403 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43408 , and binding files for special languages.
43409 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43414 \begin_inset space \space{}
43418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43426 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43430 \begin_layout Standard
43431 Some binding files, like
43435 , only have a limited scope.
43436 When looking at the end of the file
43440 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43443 \begin_layout Standard
43447 \begin_inset space ~
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43456 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43457 in the selected key binding file.
43460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43464 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43469 \begin_inset Index idx
43472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43473 Key Bindings ! Editing
43481 \begin_layout Standard
43482 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43483 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43484 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43487 Show key-bindings containing
43490 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43491 Insert there for example as keyword
43492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43499 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43500 functions that contain
43501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43509 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43510 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43514 that you will find in the
43521 \begin_layout Standard
43522 For example, to add the shortcut
43530 , select the function and press the
43535 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43536 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43539 \begin_layout Standard
43540 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43541 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43542 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43543 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43544 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43549 \begin_layout Standard
43550 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43553 \begin_layout Standard
43554 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43556 The syntax of the entries is:
43559 \begin_layout Standard
43565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43583 \begin_layout Subsection
43585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43587 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43592 \begin_inset Index idx
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43602 \begin_inset Index idx
43605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43606 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43614 \begin_layout Standard
43615 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43616 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43617 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43618 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43625 \begin_inset space ~
43630 and select the keyboard map file named
43637 \begin_layout Standard
43646 keyboard map and, if you use the
43650 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43653 arg "keymap-primary"
43659 arg "keymap-secondary"
43662 respectively or toggle between them with
43665 arg "keymap-toggle"
43671 \begin_layout Standard
43672 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43680 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43689 \begin_layout Standard
43690 You can also specify the mouse
43692 Wheel scrolling speed
43695 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43699 \begin_layout Standard
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43716 you can select a key for zooming.
43717 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43720 \begin_layout Subsection
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43725 Input completion is described in section
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43732 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43739 \begin_layout Section
43741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43748 \begin_inset Index idx
43751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43758 \begin_inset Index idx
43761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43770 \begin_layout Standard
43771 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43773 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43776 \begin_layout Description
43778 \begin_inset space ~
43781 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43782 It is the default when you
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43801 \begin_layout Description
43803 \begin_inset space ~
43806 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43808 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43822 \begin_layout Description
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43827 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43833 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43837 \begin_inset Newline newline
43841 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43861 \begin_layout Description
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43867 \begin_inset Index idx
43870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43876 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43877 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43884 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43892 will be used to save the backups.
43893 \begin_inset Newline newline
43896 Backup files have the ending
43897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43907 \begin_layout Description
43912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 \begin_inset space ~
43923 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43924 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43925 \begin_inset Newline newline
43932 You add a BibTeX-database
43937 You can edit this file with the program
43946 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43949 \begin_inset space ~
43955 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43960 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43961 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43967 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43968 \begin_inset Newline newline
43971 The pipe is also used for the
43976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43982 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43987 \begin_inset Newline newline
43990 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43991 \begin_inset Newline newline
44007 \begin_layout Description
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44012 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44015 \begin_layout Description
44017 \begin_inset space ~
44020 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44021 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44022 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44025 \begin_layout Description
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44030 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44036 You only need to specify it if you are using
44040 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44046 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44050 \begin_layout Description
44052 \begin_inset space ~
44055 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44056 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44057 where to find it on the system.
44058 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44059 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44068 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44069 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44072 \begin_layout Description
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44077 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44078 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44080 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44082 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44083 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44084 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44085 scanned for the input files.
44086 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44087 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44088 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44089 compilation may fail for some documents.
44092 \begin_layout Section
44096 \begin_layout Standard
44097 Here you can insert your
44106 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44108 \begin_inset space ~
44112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44114 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44118 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44121 \begin_layout Section
44123 \begin_inset Index idx
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44127 Language ! Settings
44133 \begin_inset Index idx
44136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44137 Settings ! Language
44145 \begin_layout Subsection
44147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44149 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44156 \begin_layout Description
44158 \begin_inset space ~
44162 \begin_inset space ~
44165 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44166 You can find its actual translation status here:
44167 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44169 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44176 \begin_layout Description
44178 \begin_inset space ~
44181 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44183 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44184 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44201 The most widespread language package is
44206 \begin_inset Index idx
44209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44210 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44215 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44216 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44217 alternative language package
44222 \begin_inset Index idx
44225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44226 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44231 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44232 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44238 The available selections are described in section
44239 \begin_inset space ~
44243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44245 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44252 \begin_layout Description
44254 \begin_inset space ~
44257 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44258 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44259 An example is the start command
44265 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44270 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44285 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44290 \begin_layout Description
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44300 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44301 command toggles the package on and off.
44304 \begin_layout Description
44306 \begin_inset space ~
44310 \begin_inset space ~
44313 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44317 \begin_layout Description
44319 \begin_inset space ~
44323 \begin_inset space ~
44326 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44327 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44328 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44329 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44336 \begin_layout Description
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44341 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44343 When this option is not set, the
44346 \begin_inset space ~
44351 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44352 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44355 \begin_inset space ~
44363 \begin_layout Description
44365 \begin_inset space ~
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44377 When it is not set, the
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44385 is set to the end of the document.
44388 \begin_layout Description
44390 \begin_inset space ~
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44397 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44398 language will be underlined in blue.
44401 \begin_layout Description
44403 \begin_inset space ~
44407 \begin_inset space ~
44410 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44411 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44414 \begin_layout Description
44416 \begin_inset space ~
44419 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44420 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44421 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44422 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44425 \begin_layout Subsection
44429 \begin_layout Standard
44430 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44431 \begin_inset space ~
44435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44437 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44444 \begin_layout Section
44448 \begin_layout Subsection
44452 \begin_layout Description
44454 \begin_inset space ~
44458 \begin_inset space ~
44461 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44464 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44465 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44467 \begin_inset space ~
44473 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44476 \begin_layout Description
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44482 \begin_inset Index idx
44485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44492 \begin_inset Index idx
44495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44496 Settings ! Date format
44501 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44502 \begin_inset Newline newline
44506 \begin_inset Flex URL
44509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44511 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44517 \begin_inset Newline newline
44520 For example the format
44521 \begin_inset Newline newline
44525 \begin_inset Newline newline
44528 prints the date as day/month/year.
44531 \begin_layout Description
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44537 \begin_inset space ~
44540 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44543 \begin_layout Description
44545 \begin_inset space ~
44548 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44550 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44558 For a detailed description see section
44560 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44565 \begin_inset space ~
44573 \begin_layout Subsection
44575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44582 \begin_inset Index idx
44585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44592 \begin_inset Index idx
44595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44604 \begin_layout Description
44606 \begin_inset space ~
44609 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44614 The name will be used when the
44619 \begin_inset Newline newline
44623 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44631 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44639 \begin_layout Description
44641 \begin_inset space ~
44644 command is the command LyX
44645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44652 LaTeX uses for printing.
44660 \begin_layout Description
44662 \begin_inset space ~
44666 \begin_inset space ~
44669 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44670 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44671 of the program that provides the
44678 \begin_layout Description
44680 \begin_inset space ~
44684 \begin_inset space ~
44688 \begin_inset space ~
44691 printer This option works only for the
44696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44708 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44709 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44712 \begin_layout Subsection
44717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44727 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44732 \begin_inset Index idx
44735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44744 \begin_layout Description
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44761 \begin_inset space ~
44765 \begin_inset space ~
44768 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44773 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44794 are used for Cyrillic.
44795 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44808 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44809 LyX sets up in the background.
44810 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44813 \begin_layout Description
44815 \begin_inset space ~
44819 \begin_inset space ~
44822 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44827 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44830 \begin_layout Description
44832 \begin_inset space ~
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44840 \begin_inset space ~
44844 \begin_inset space ~
44847 options They only have an effect when the program
44851 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44854 \begin_layout Standard
44855 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44856 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44857 manuals of the applications.
44860 \begin_layout Description
44862 \begin_inset space ~
44865 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44866 \begin_inset space ~
44870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44872 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44879 \begin_layout Description
44881 \begin_inset space ~
44884 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44885 \begin_inset space ~
44889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44891 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44898 \begin_layout Description
44900 \begin_inset space ~
44903 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44904 \begin_inset space ~
44908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44910 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44917 \begin_layout Description
44922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44930 \begin_inset space ~
44933 command Command for the program
44937 that is described in the section
44943 Additional Features
44948 \begin_layout Standard
44949 There are additionally the following options:
44952 \begin_layout Description
44954 \begin_inset space ~
44958 \begin_inset space ~
44962 \begin_inset space ~
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44973 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44991 to separate folders.
44992 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44993 \begin_inset Index idx
44996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45003 \begin_inset Index idx
45006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45015 \begin_layout Description
45017 \begin_inset space ~
45021 \begin_inset space ~
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45029 \begin_inset space ~
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45040 changes Removes all manually set
45046 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45047 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45054 dialog when changing the document class.
45057 \begin_layout Section
45059 \begin_inset space ~
45063 \begin_inset Index idx
45066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45075 \begin_layout Subsection
45077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45079 name "sub:Converters"
45084 \begin_inset Index idx
45087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45096 \begin_layout Standard
45097 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45098 from one format to another.
45099 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45100 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45112 field and press the
45117 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45126 drop-down list, modify the
45130 field and press the
45137 \begin_layout Standard
45140 Converter File Cache
45146 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45148 Maximum Age (in days
45151 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45152 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45155 \begin_layout Standard
45156 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45157 definition, is described in the section
45168 \begin_layout Subsection
45170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45172 name "sec:File-Formats"
45177 \begin_inset Index idx
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45187 \begin_inset Index idx
45190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45199 \begin_layout Standard
45200 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45209 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45212 \begin_layout Standard
45213 You can also define the
45215 Default output format
45217 that is used when you use
45219 View, Update, View Master Document
45223 Update Master Document
45229 menu or the toolbar.
45232 \begin_layout Standard
45233 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45244 \begin_layout Standard
45245 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45246 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45247 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45248 This is done by specifying a
45253 More about this is described in the section
45264 \begin_layout Chapter
45265 Units available in LyX
45266 \begin_inset Index idx
45269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45278 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45285 \begin_layout Standard
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45293 reference "tab:Units"
45297 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45300 \begin_layout Standard
45301 \begin_inset Float table
45307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45308 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45326 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45334 \begin_inset Tabular
45335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45336 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45489 scaled point (65536
45490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45550 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45605 % of original image width
45612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45819 \begin_layout Chapter
45821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45823 name "chap:Credits"
45830 \begin_layout Standard
45831 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45832 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45835 \begin_layout Itemize
45838 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45841 \begin_layout Itemize
45847 \begin_layout Itemize
45853 \begin_layout Itemize
45859 \begin_layout Itemize
45865 \begin_layout Itemize
45871 \begin_layout Itemize
45877 \begin_layout Itemize
45883 \begin_layout Itemize
45886 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45889 \begin_layout Itemize
45895 \begin_layout Itemize
45901 \begin_layout Itemize
45907 \begin_layout Itemize
45913 \begin_layout Itemize
45919 \begin_layout Itemize
45925 \begin_layout Itemize
45931 \begin_layout Itemize
45937 \begin_layout Itemize
45939 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45948 \begin_layout Standard
45949 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45952 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45959 \begin_layout Bibliography
45960 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45961 LatexCommand bibitem
45968 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45971 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45976 \begin_inset Newline newline
45980 \begin_inset Flex URL
45983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45993 \begin_layout Bibliography
45994 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45995 LatexCommand bibitem
45996 key "latexcompanion"
46000 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46002 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46005 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46008 \begin_layout Bibliography
46009 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46010 LatexCommand bibitem
46015 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46018 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46021 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46024 \begin_layout Bibliography
46025 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46026 LatexCommand bibitem
46033 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46036 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46039 \begin_layout Bibliography
46040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46041 LatexCommand bibitem
46053 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46056 \begin_layout Bibliography
46057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46058 LatexCommand bibitem
46064 \begin_inset Newline newline
46068 \begin_inset Flex URL
46071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46073 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46081 \begin_layout Bibliography
46082 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46083 LatexCommand bibitem
46089 \begin_inset Newline newline
46093 \begin_inset Flex URL
46096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46098 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46106 \begin_layout Bibliography
46107 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46108 LatexCommand bibitem
46114 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46116 name "Documentation"
46117 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46126 \begin_inset Newline newline
46130 \begin_inset Flex URL
46133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46135 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46143 \begin_layout Bibliography
46144 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46145 LatexCommand bibitem
46151 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46153 name "Documentation"
46154 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46158 how to use the program
46163 \begin_inset Newline newline
46167 \begin_inset Flex URL
46170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46172 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46180 \begin_layout Bibliography
46181 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46182 LatexCommand bibitem
46188 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46190 name "Documentation"
46191 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46200 \begin_inset Newline newline
46204 \begin_inset Flex URL
46207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46209 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46217 \begin_layout Bibliography
46218 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46219 LatexCommand bibitem
46225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46227 name "Documentation"
46228 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46237 \begin_inset Newline newline
46241 \begin_inset Flex URL
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46246 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46254 \begin_layout Bibliography
46255 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46256 LatexCommand bibitem
46262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46264 name "Documentation"
46265 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46269 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46270 \begin_inset Newline newline
46274 \begin_inset Flex URL
46277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46287 \begin_layout Bibliography
46288 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46289 LatexCommand bibitem
46295 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46297 name "Documentation"
46298 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46302 of the LaTeX-package
46307 \begin_inset Index idx
46310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46311 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46317 \begin_inset Newline newline
46321 \begin_inset Flex URL
46324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46326 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46334 \begin_layout Bibliography
46335 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46336 LatexCommand bibitem
46342 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46344 name "Documentation"
46345 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46349 of the LaTeX-package
46354 \begin_inset Index idx
46357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46358 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46364 \begin_inset Newline newline
46368 \begin_inset Flex URL
46371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46373 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46381 \begin_layout Bibliography
46382 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46383 LatexCommand bibitem
46389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46391 name "Documentation"
46392 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46396 of the LaTeX-package
46401 \begin_inset Index idx
46404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46405 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46411 \begin_inset Newline newline
46415 \begin_inset Flex URL
46418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46420 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46428 \begin_layout Bibliography
46429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46430 LatexCommand bibitem
46436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46438 name "Documentation"
46439 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46443 of the LaTeX-package
46448 \begin_inset Index idx
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46452 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46458 \begin_inset Newline newline
46462 \begin_inset Flex URL
46465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46467 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46475 \begin_layout Bibliography
46476 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46477 LatexCommand bibitem
46483 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46485 name "Documentation"
46486 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46490 of the LaTeX-package
46495 \begin_inset Index idx
46498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46499 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46505 \begin_inset Newline newline
46509 \begin_inset Flex URL
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46514 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46522 \begin_layout Bibliography
46523 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46524 LatexCommand bibitem
46530 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46532 name "Documentation"
46533 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46537 of the LaTeX-package
46542 \begin_inset Index idx
46545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46546 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46552 \begin_inset Newline newline
46556 \begin_inset Flex URL
46559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46561 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46569 \begin_layout Bibliography
46570 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46571 LatexCommand bibitem
46577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46579 name "Documentation"
46580 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46584 of the LaTeX-package
46589 \begin_inset Index idx
46592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46593 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46599 \begin_inset Newline newline
46603 \begin_inset Flex URL
46606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46608 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46616 \begin_layout Bibliography
46617 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46618 LatexCommand bibitem
46624 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46627 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46631 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46632 \begin_inset Newline newline
46636 \begin_inset Flex URL
46639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46641 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46649 \begin_layout Bibliography
46650 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46651 LatexCommand bibitem
46657 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46660 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46664 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46665 \begin_inset Newline newline
46669 \begin_inset Flex URL
46672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46674 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46682 \begin_layout Bibliography
46683 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46684 LatexCommand bibitem
46690 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46693 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46697 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46698 \begin_inset Newline newline
46702 \begin_inset Flex URL
46705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46707 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46715 \begin_layout Bibliography
46716 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46717 LatexCommand bibitem
46723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46726 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46730 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46731 \begin_inset Newline newline
46735 \begin_inset Flex URL
46738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46740 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46748 \begin_layout Bibliography
46749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46750 LatexCommand bibitem
46756 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46759 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46763 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46764 \begin_inset Newline newline
46768 \begin_inset Flex URL
46771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46773 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46781 \begin_layout Bibliography
46782 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46783 LatexCommand bibitem
46789 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46792 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46796 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46797 \begin_inset Newline newline
46801 \begin_inset Flex URL
46804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46806 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46814 \begin_layout Bibliography
46815 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46816 LatexCommand bibitem
46822 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46825 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46829 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46830 \begin_inset Newline newline
46834 \begin_inset Flex URL
46837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46839 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46847 \begin_layout Bibliography
46848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46849 LatexCommand bibitem
46855 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46858 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46862 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46863 \begin_inset Newline newline
46867 \begin_inset Flex URL
46870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46872 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46880 \begin_layout Bibliography
46881 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46882 LatexCommand bibitem
46888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46891 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46895 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46896 \begin_inset Newline newline
46900 \begin_inset Flex URL
46903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46905 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46913 \begin_layout Bibliography
46914 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46915 LatexCommand bibitem
46921 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46924 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46928 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46929 \begin_inset Newline newline
46933 \begin_inset Flex URL
46936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46938 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46946 \begin_layout Bibliography
46947 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46948 LatexCommand bibitem
46954 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46957 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46961 about new features in
46966 \begin_inset Newline newline
46970 \begin_inset Flex URL
46973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46975 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46983 \begin_layout Standard
46984 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47018 \begin_inset Note Note
47021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47028 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47029 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47030 bibliography is the second one:
47038 \begin_layout Standard
47039 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47040 LatexCommand bibtex
47041 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47042 options "biblio/alphadin"
47049 \begin_layout Standard
47050 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47053 \begin_layout Standard
47054 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47055 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47061 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47062 LatexCommand printindex